QC Industries Driven by customers ... powered by proven products Low profile conveyors Product Catalog LLC
QC Industries
Driven by customers ... powered by proven products
Low profile conveyors
Product Catalog
LLC
125 Series Magnetic ConveyorsApplication Assistance Form 116-117Specifications & Dimensions 16Features & Benefits 17Technical Data 18How to Order 19Belting 20-21Side & Guide Rails 22-25Mounts 26-27Stands 28-29Drives & Mounting Packages 30-37Drive Accessories 38-40Gang Driving 41Automation Accessories 42-43
Page
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Contents
2
125 Series Standard Conveyors
125 Series Cleated Conveyors
Application Assistance Form 116-117Specifications & Dimensions 8Features & Benefits 9Technical Data 10How to Order 11Belting 20-21Side & Guide Rails 22-25Mounts 26-27Stands 28-29Drives & Mounting Packages 30-37Drive Accessories 38-40Gang Driving 41Automation Accessories 42-43
Page
Application Assistance Form 116-117Specifications & Dimensions 12Features & Benefits 13Technical Data 14How to Order 15Belting 20-21Side & Guide Rails 22-25Mounts 26-27Stands 28-29Drives & Mounting Packages 30-37Drive Accessories 38-40Gang Driving 41Automation Accessories 42-43
Page
125 Series Corrosion Resistant ConveyorsApplication Assistance Form 116-117Specifications & Dimensions 44Features & Benefits 45Technical Data 46How to Order 47Belting 52-53Side & Guide Rails 54-57Mounts 58Stands 59Drives & Mounting Packages 60-65Drive Accessories 66Automation Accessories 67
Page
QC Industries 513.753.6000 3
125 Z Series Angled Frame ConveyorsApplication Assistance Form 118-119Z - Specifications & Dimensions 68Z - Features & Benefits 69L - Specifications & Dimensions 70L - Features & Benefits 71R - Specifications & Dimensions 72R - Features & Benefits 73U - Specifications & Dimensions 74U - Features & Benefits 75N - Specifications & Dimensions 76N - Features & Benefits 77Technical Data-How to Size & Order 78-81Guides, Flared Side Rails & Hoppers 82-83Stands 84-85Drives & Mounting Packages 86-89Drive Accessories 90-91
Page
250 Series End & Center Drive ConveyorsApplication Assistance Form 120-121End Drive Specifications & Dimensions 92End Drive Features & Benefits 93End Drive Technical Data 94End Drive How to Order 95Center Drive Specifications & Dimensions 96Center Drive Features & Benefits 97Center Drive Technical Data 98Center Drive How to Order 99Belting 100-101Side & Guide Rails 102-103Automation Accessories 104Mounts 105Stands 106-107Drives & Mounting Packages 108-113Drive Accessories 114-115
Page
Learn about QC Industries 4-7Conveyor Selection Guide 123Warranty & Returned Goods Information 122
Page
Additional Information
125 Series Cleated Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Application Assistance Form 116-117Specifications & Dimensions 48Features & Benefits 49Technical Data 50How to Order 51Belting 52-53Side & Guide Rails 54-57Mounts 58Stands 59Drives & Mounting Packages 60-65Drive Accessories 66Automation Accessories 67
Page
4
Standing the Test of Time
Since 1981 companies fromaround the world have beenrelying on QC Industries fortheir conveyor needs. Our55,000 square footcorporate headquarters,
located in Cincinnati, Ohio, offers visitors a 2000square foot display room filled with a fullassortment of operating conveyors andinteractive conveyor displays. Come visit us andget hands-on with yournext conveyor project!
If you're looking for something a little different thanour standard conveyors, just contact us and we'llcustomize it for you. Whether it's a simplebracket to integrate with acustomized piece of equipment,full assembly of a turnkeyproject, or a completelynew conveyor design tomake your applicationparameters work; give us acall. We stand ready todiscuss your needs in detail.
Driven
We offer standard lowprofile conveyors that areless than 2 inches in theiroverall height. Our standardunits range from 2 incheswide up to 24 inches wideand up to 25 feet in length.We offer a variety of styles
including Standard Automation Conveyors,Cleated Belt Conveyors, Magnetic Conveyors,Corrosion Resistant Conveyors and fiveconfigurations of Angled Frame Conveyors. Wealso have a large selection of standardaccessories to customize every conveyorincluding sides, guides, mounts, stands, motiondetection and more...
Special Orders: Our Specialty
One-Stop Shopping
QC Industries is a LeanManufacturing Company. In2003 our company decided togo "Lean" and we intend tocontinue with our lean effortsinto the future. From "PolicyDeployment" to "Six SigmaQuality" to "Kaizen Events", we personifycontinual improvement. All of our products aredesigned based on the "Voice of the Customer",and our "5S Committee" is constantly ensuringthat we are creating a self-disciplined and self-sustaining culture to build a stronger organization.
Voice of the Customer
5
As standard, our conveyorsare constructed of highimpact-resistant heavy duty 10gauge steel; a framework thatis laser cut and formed as onesolid piece. This single-body
frame design is cutting edge technology thatensures frame integrity and overall conveyorperformance. Our conveyors are also designedto allow for bearing lubrication on the fly. Thisresults in zero down time during regularmaintenance, saving our customers both timeand money. Belt tracking is designed into bothends of our conveyors for precision adjustmentsin the field. Our conveyors are built to last.
PackagingWorkcell Assembly OEM Machine Integration Injection MoldingPharmaceuticalFood ProcessingLabeling Bar Code ScanningHigh Heat & Hot Part ApplicationsMetal StampingIncline/Decline OperationsOverhead Pick Off & TransferFerrous & Non-Ferrous Part SeparationClean Rooms
Great products are madeon great equipment; andour products are madeon the industry's finestequipment. From fullyautomated robotic lasersused to manufacture ourfabricated components to
high tech computer-controlled CNC machineryused to produce our machine components, wepersonify state-of-the-art manufacturing. Wetake pride in delivering quality in every productwe produce.
Customersby
With representative organizationslocated throughout the U.S., Canada,Mexico, Europe & Australia, ourextensive network of distributors andmanufacturer’s representatives areready to help you with all your
conveyor needs. We have multiple representationin most localities to cover thevariety of markets that weserve, enabling us to offerspecialists within givenindustries. Give us a call onyour next conveyor project andlet us help you size up awinner.
Lifetime Performance Application Spectrum
State-of-the-Art Manufacturing Worldwide Distribution Network
6
Quality assurance andcustomer satisfaction aretop priority at QCIndustries. All of ourconveyors are assembledand tested prior to leavingthe factory. We adhere toa strict three-signaturesign off system. The first step requires techniciansto take ownership and personally sign off on ordersthey have filled; the next two tests and signaturesare extra steps in ensuring that you receive exactlywhat you have ordered. We strive to get it right foryou the first time.
In today's fast pacedbusiness world, when youneed a quote, most oftenyou need it fast. We prideourselves on turning quotesaround to our customerswithin 24 hours of receivingthe application parameters.We recognize that time ismoney and to that end, we
want to earn your respect. Give us a call and putus to the test ... you'll be glad you did.
Once you have sized yourapplication and placed yourorder, the last thing youneed to worry about iswhether or not it will ship ontime. At QC Industries weprovide world class on-timedelivery. We also institute
continual improvement efforts focused atcontinuing to be the industry's best. Our flexibleinventory system allows us to expedite orderswhen needed and ship conveyors same day ifnecessary. Once your order has shipped, yourorganization can receive a confirmation andtracking information to follow your order right toyour dock door.
PPoowweerreedd
Experienced Tech Support
We have experiencedengineers ready right now toassist you with the most difficultof applications. We also prideourselves on having highlytrained inside salesrepresentatives assigned to
every customer, so we can provideindividualized service from the beginning of thequote to post-shipping and follow up. If you needassistance in the field after the sale, we havefactory service technicians that can bedispatched for travel directly to your site. Westrive to exceed your expectations.
Superior Quality Assurance
24-Hour Quote Turnaround World Class Delivery
7
Go online towww.qcindustries.com andlearn more about ourorganization. You will find linksto all the products that QCIndustries has available, many
of which are not covered in this catalog. You willalso find where we are exhibiting at trade shows,directions to our facility, and links to sign up forour QC Communicator newsletter; which offersinsightful information into our products andapplications. Information is available at yourfingertips right now, so go for it!
We offer CAD disks to helpyou lay out yourapplications quickly andprecisely. We also offerCAD information online. Ifwe are designingsomething special for your
application, we can provide a full 3D model for“drop in” integration with your CAD package. Weare continually striving to provide the necessarytools you need to succeed on your next conveyorproject.
We have built our reputation bycombining innovative designs withhigh quality and exceptional service,earning the respect of end users andsystem integrators around the globe.Our extensive network of returncustomers powers
us every day. Our customersbecome customers for life.Let us show you why.
byProven Products
Computer-Aided Design
Check Out Our Web Site A World-Class Company
A benchmark of the QCIndustries design is an eccentricsnap out sealed idler cartridgethat allows single point belttensioning and, therefore, thefastest belt change on themarket. This belt change is normally achieved withoutever having to remove or adjust our drive packages.We challenge you to find that in our competition. Ourconveyors are also designed with a cutting edgecrowned floating pulley system with thrust washers.This technology protects your bearings against off-center loading, and controls belt misalignment thatmight otherwise result from camber.
Innovative Design
.75
.88 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE.82
1.89 *
.42
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
6.13.75
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
W + 2.33 W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Standard Conveyors
8
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 2” to 24”• Length 24” to 144”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 10
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 9
Features & Benefits
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over50 various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that arefilled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allowsthe assembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protect bearingsagainst off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profileconveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assemblydesigned to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that arefilled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into thedrive assembly provide axial float,which allows the assembly to movewith the natural camber of the belt andprotect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zerodown time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimalconditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid outputdesign, or hex through shaft design
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Standard Conveyors
10
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example,demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we havedeveloped certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your applicationrequires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotorarrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 10-A
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 10-B
Conveyor Friction - Figure 10-C
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotorfor the conveyor. (See pages 30-37)
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
2550 37.5
75 7550
100
150
100
150125
200
250300
450
175
87.5
225
Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
Lbs.
Belt Width
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
AngleFactor
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
00.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
0.0
0.30.6
0.81.1
1.41.6
1.82.1
2.32.5
2.62.8
2.9 3.0 3.1
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
36 42 4860
7284
96
132
168
Technical Data
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 10-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyorwidth listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drivepulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two.Otherwise, multiply the nominal load from Line One times an accumulationfactor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 20 and 0.3 for MAA standardurethane). Enter result on Line Two.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining ordeclining applications, choose a factor from Figure 10-B based upon theangle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from LineOne. Enter result on Line Three.
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent smallparts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise,multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found onpage 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factorof 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines one through four together, please referenceFigure 10-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greaterthan the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in,add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choosethe value from Figure 10-C. Enter result on Line Five.
lbs. 0
1.
2. Accumulation 2.
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
4. Side Seals 4.
5. Conveyor Friction 5.
Note: See page 11
STOPSTOP
125 Series Standard
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 20-21.
Example: 1ESBH02-048-ASQ-MAA125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame.Conveyor measures 2” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley.The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 11
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
- - -1 E S H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*
2”
02
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
24”
024
36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C 1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output Shaft
1/2” HexThru
Hex Input
S
H
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
DDetectable
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.43
Rolling Nosebar R
Option
see p
g.42
Option
see p
g.41
Option
see p
g.41
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship tothe customer. Accessories such as Drives,Stands, Mounts, and Guides arepackaged separately and are shippedunassembled with the conveyor to preventdamage during shipment. Completeassembly can be provided upon request;please contact our factory for details.
Optional: Snap-In Wiper is used with smooth surfaced, low friction belts for residueremoval. This item snaps into the underside of the conveyor frame and can be installedat either end of the conveyor. Shown here on the drive end.To Order:Fill in the last two digits of the part number with the conveyor widthPart Number: 125-0192-WWExample: 125-0192-08 Snap-In Wiper for an 8” wide conveyor
* 1/8” sq. key included
Note: proceed to page 22 tocontinue sizing your conveyor...
Custom colors available - Contact factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Cleated Conveyors
12
CLEAT HEIGHTSEE PAGE 51
.75.88 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE.82
1.89 *
.42
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
6.13.75
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
W + 2.33
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
W - 1.37 =CLEAT WIDTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 2” to 24”• Length 24” to 144”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple Cleat Heights Available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 14
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 13
Features & Benefits
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 15 Step 4 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with 1 inch cleats
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available invarious styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacingand never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that are filledwith high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allowsthe assembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profileconveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assemblydesigned to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that arefilled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, whichallows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protectbearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication ofbearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design,or hex through shaft design
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Cleated Conveyors
14
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demandsthe conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developedcertain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load yourapplication requires. The result will then be used to help choose thegearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Conveyor Friction - Figure 14-C
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotorfor the conveyor. (See pages 30-37)
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 14-B
Technical Data
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines One and Two together, please referenceFigure 14-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greaterthan the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.
lbs.
Factor
0.0
0.30.6
0.81.1
1.41.6
1.82.1
2.32.5
2.62.8
2.9 3.0 3.1
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
Angle
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
00.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
36 42 4860
7284
96
132
168
0
1. Nominal Load
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 14-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Eachconveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushingand drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
1.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Two. For inclining ordeclining applications, choose a factor from Figure 14-B based upon theangle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from LineOne.
Enter result on Line Two.
2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 2.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in,add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choosethe value from Figure 14-C.
Enter result on Line Three.
3. Conveyor Friction 3.
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
02 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
2550 37.5
75 7550
100
150
100
150125
200
250300
450
175
87.5
225Lbs.
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Belt Width
STOPSTOP
Note: See page 15
QC Industries 513.753.6000 15
Step 1
Step 2
Step 5
- - -1 E S H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*
2”
02
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
24”
024
36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2,divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number ofcleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats.
Example: 1ESBH06-048-ASQ-CAE016125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyormeasures 6” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive outputshaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
Step 3
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Step 5
Step 4
Choose a base belt material and cleat height
UAC (White Urethane)MAA (Standard Urethane)
Base Belt Material 5mm 19mm 1/2” 3/4” 1” w/corr. sides 1” 2” 3”CABCBB
CADCBD
Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62”Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)
CAKCAGCAE CAF CAICAH
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship tothe customer. Accessories such as Drives,Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packagedseparately and are shipped unassembledwith the conveyor to prevent damageduring shipment. Complete assembly canbe provided upon request; please contactour factory for details.
CBE CBF CBH CBG CBI CBK
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C 1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output Shaft
1/2” HexThru
Hex Input
S
H
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
DDetectable
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.42
Option
see p
g.41
Option
see p
g.41
* 1/8” sq. key included
Note: proceed to page 22 tocontinue sizing your conveyor...
Custom colors available - Contact factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
16
MAGNET SPACINGSEE PAGE 19
W + 2.33
.42
2.69 NO MAGNETS 4.00NO MAGNETS
1.89 *
.88 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE.82
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
.75
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 2” to 24”• Length 24” to 144”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 18
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 17
Features & Benefits
Conveyor• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained
areas
• Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-bodyframe construction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Ceramic magnets are custom positioned within the conveyor framework to achieve an optimummagnetic field and smooth product movement for your application
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturingequipment
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that are filledwith high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allowsthe assembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protect bearingsagainst off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profileconveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assemblydesigned to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that arefilled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, whichallows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protectbearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication ofbearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design,or hex through shaft design
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
18
Conveyor Friction - Figure 18-D
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
Con
stan
t
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.001 2 83 4 5 6 7
0.010.08
0.16
0.23
0.30
0.39
0.46
0.74
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
36 42 4860
7284
96
132
168
Technical Data
0
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demandsthe conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developedcertain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your applicationrequires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotorarrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotorfor the conveyor. (See pages 30-37)
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)metal parts weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120lbs. Use Figure 18-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyorwidth listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drivepulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
To achieve magnetic pull, there are rows of magnets down the length of the conveyor.The maximum number of rows can be determined by dividing the conveyor width bytwo (not to exceed eight rows). Choose the number of magnet rows and then multiplythe load by the factor from Figure 18-B. Enter result on Line Two.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining ordeclining applications, choose a factor from Figure 18-C based upon theangle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from LineOne. Enter result on Line Three.
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent smallparts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise,multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found onpage 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factorof 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines one through four together, please referenceFigure 18-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greaterthan the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in,add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choosethe value from Figure 18-D. Enter result on Line Five.
lbs.
1.
2. Magnetic Factor 2.
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
4. Side Seals 4.
5. Conveyor Friction 5.
Number of Magnet Rows
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 18-C
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
AngleFactor
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
00.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
0.0
0.30.6
0.81.1
1.41.6
1.82.1
2.32.5
2.62.8
2.9 3.0 3.1
Magnetic Load Factors - Figure 18-B
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A500450400350300250200150100
50
0 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
2550 37.5
75 7550100
150100
150125
200
250300
450
175
87.5
225Lbs.
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Belt Width
STOPSTOP
Note: See page 19
QC Industries 513.753.6000 19
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 20 and 21.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
1 = 125 E = End Drive M = Magnetic H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*
2”
02
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
24”
024
36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
036 048 060 072 096 120 144
*Contact factory for special lengths
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
Step 5
Please send the part to be conveyed to our Sales Department to evaluate for proper magneticarrangement. Ceramic magnets are positioned in a stainless steel frame according to each application.This permits a wide variety of magnetic field strengths and location options. Our application specialistswill complete the part number for you. Below is an illustration of how we document the magnet spacing.
- - -1 E M H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
-E
4 Row Spacing
Distance from tail before magnetic field begins2Number of magnet sections from tail3
E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
6” Section from Tail
6” Sections on Row
Row
Spacing
Step 5
Consult factory
As standard, we assemble theconveyor, track the pre-tensioned beltand quality check every conveyorbefore we ship to the customer.Accessories such as Drives, Stands,Mounts, and Guides are packagedseparately and are shippedunassembled with the conveyor toprevent damage during shipment.Complete assembly can be providedupon request; please contact ourfactory for details.
Num
ber of rows
Numberof rows
1
See Step 5below
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C 1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output Shaft
1/2” HexThru
Hex Input
S
H
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
DDetectable
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.42
Option
see p
g.41
Option
see p
g.41
* 1/8” sq. key included
Note: proceed to page 22 tocontinue sizing your conveyor...
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Conveyors
20
High Friction BeltsA. Grey Diamond Top High AdhesionB. Green High Tack PVCC. Beige FDA High AdhesionD. Black Lateral Grooved High AdhesionE. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)A. White FDA Fabric AccumulatorC. Black Tight Weave AccumulatorD. Grey Textured Urethane AccumulatorE. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator
Heat-Resistant BeltsA. White Silicone Heat ResistorB. White Silicone Translucent ResistorC. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat ResistorD. Blue Nitrile Heat ResistorE. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant BeltsA. Yellow Cut ResistorB. Standard UrethaneC. Black Dimple Top Cut ResistorD. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor
FDA BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Pure White FDAD. Woven White FDAE. White FDA Urethane High AdhesionStatic Conductive BeltsA. Textured Carbon ImpregnatedB. Accumulation Static ConductiveC. Low Friction Static ConductiveD. Structured Static ConductiveTranslucent Belts
A. Green Translucent AccumulatorB. FDA Fabric Translucent AccumulatorC. Silicone Translucent Accumulator
Non-Marking BeltsA. Felt Topped Product ProtectorB. Fabric Topped Product ProtectorC. Cotton Topped Product ProtectorD. Black Elastomer Product Protector
Color Contrasting BeltsA. Gray Textured ContrasterB. Smooth Green Urethane ContrasterC. Dark Green PVC ContrasterD. Light Blue Urethane ContrasterE. Smooth Black PVC Contraster
Release Properties BeltsA. Beige Silicone Product ReleaseB. White PVC Product ReleaseC. Textured Silicone Product ReleaseD. Smooth Habilene Product ReleaseE. Smooth Silicone Product ReleaseSpecialty/Profile BeltsA. Green Sawtooth Profile BeltB. White Grooved RubberC. Stipple Top PVC ProfileD. Negative Pyramid ProfileE. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile BeltChemical Resistant BeltsDue to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Ourapplication specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
FAAFABFACFADFAF
AAAAACAADAAE
HAAHABHACHADHAE
IAAIABIACIAD
EAAEABEACEAD
UAAUABUACUADUAE
TAATABTAC
PAAPABPACPADPAE
NAANABNACNAD
RAARABRACRADRAE
SAASABSACSADSAE
SnakeskinMatte
SmoothLongitudinal Groove
Rough Top
FabricFabric
TexturedFabric
Fine TextureFabric
SmoothCoarse Structure
Smooth
SmoothSmooth
Dimple TopStructured
SmoothSmooth, Sealed Edge
MatteSmoothSmooth
TexturedRough Texture
SmoothStructured
TexturedFabric
Textured
TexturedSmoothMatteMatte
Smooth
SmoothMatte, SmoothFine Texture
SmoothTextured
SawtoothLateral Groove
Stipple TopTextured
Longitudinal Groove
FeltFabricFabricFelt
PVCPVC SoftSilicone
PVCPVC
UrethaneUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane Impregnated
SiliconeSilicone Impregnated
SiliconeNitrile RubberNitrile Rubber
UrethaneUrethane
Hard UrethaneNitrile Rubber
UrethaneUrethaneUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedNitrile Rubber
UrethaneNBR Impregnated Fleece
Impregnated PUUrethane Impregnated
Silicone
PVCUrethane
PVCUrethane
PVC
FeltSpun Polyester
CottonPolyester
SiliconeNon-Stick PVC
SiliconeHabileneSilicone
PVCNitrile Rubber
PVCUrethane
PVC
Light GreyDark Green
BeigeBlackBlack
WhiteBlack
Light GreyDark Green
WhiteWhiteWhiteBlueWhite
YellowWhiteBlackBlack
WhiteWhiteWhite
TranslucentWhite
GreyGreen
Dark GreenLight Blue
Black
BlackBlackBlackBlack
Light GreenTranslucentTranslucent
BeigeWhiteWhiteWhiteWhite
GreenWhiteWhiteWhiteGreen
WhiteWhite
Natural WhiteBlack
NONOYESNONO
HIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH
212212212194212
176176176158176
NOYESYESYESYES
0.1030.1450.0720.0830.185
YESNONOYES
NONOYESNONO
NOYESNONO
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONONO
YESYESYES
NOYESNOYESNO
YESYESYESNO
YESYESNOYESYES
NOYESYESYESNO
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMEDMED
LOWLOWHIGHMED
LOWLOWLOWMEDHIGH
MEDHIGHLOWMED
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMEDMED
MEDMEDMEDMED
HIGHLOWMEDMEDLOW
HIGHHIGHMEDMEDHIGH
212248140175
356356400300300
230212248176
212212230248176
212212158176
175248176
158176212212212
175175175302
212225212212175
212194356176176
176212140175
356356350212212
194176212176
176176194212176
176212158176
175212176
158176176176176
176158356176176
176225176176175
175175175248
YESNOYESYES
YESYESNOYESYES
YESYESYESYES
0.0540.0510.0600.054
0.0590.0510.0850.0790.067
0.0600.0750.0830.100
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONO
YESYESYESYESNO
NONONOYES
YESYESYESYESNO
YESNONOYESYES
0.0750.0750.0610.0470.050
0.0630.0800.0400.100
0.0230.0240.040
0.0600.0500.0750.0630.071
0.0700.0670.0720.098
0.0720.0590.0590.0900.040
0.1770.2100.1060.0780.175
Top
Surfa
ce D
escr
iptio
n
Top
Surfa
ce M
ater
ial
Belt
Colo
r
FDA
Tops
ide
Coef
ficie
ntof
Fric
tion
(CoF
)Sh
ort T
erm
Par
tM
ax T
empe
ratu
re (
°F)
Max
. Am
bien
t Ope
ratin
g
Tem
pera
ture
(°F)
Anti-
Stat
icAv
erag
e Be
lt Th
ickn
ess
(inch
es)
Belt
Orde
ring
Code
Belt Selection Guide
Multi-Purpose BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Option #2-Spill Edge CleatD. Option #3-Perforated Belt
MAAMABMACMAD
SmoothSmooth, Sealed Edge
Longitudinal Serrated CleatSmooth, Perforations
UrethaneUrethaneUrethaneUrethane
WhiteWhiteWhiteWhite
YESYESYESYES
LOWLOWLOWLOW
212212212212
176176176176
YESYESYESYES
0.0750.0750.0750.075
Specifications subject to change - consult factory
eeee
104
104
105
105
QC Industries 513.753.6000 21
QC Industries offers conveyor belting for awide variety of applications and industries.These pages cover a number of the morepopular belts we have provided through theyears. These belts have all been tested at QCIndustries and offer a compatible fit to the 125Series conveyors. If you have a specific needthat is not covered on these pages, please
contact one of our sales engineers directly atthe factory to discuss your applicationparameters.
To Order With Conveyor:Please use the three-digit QC belt codenumber for conveyor ordering on pages 11,15, and 19.
Chemical Resistant BeltsDue to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our applicationspecialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
To Order Belt Only:Choose nominal conveyor width and length ininches and enter the three-digit belt code.
1E - WW - LLL -
Example: 1E-08-120-MAAStandard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120”long 125 Series conveyor
Multi-Purpose Belts
High-Friction Belts
Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)
Cut-Resistant Belts
Heat-Resistant Belts
FDA/USDA Belts
Static Conductive Belts
Translucent Belts
Color Contrasting Belts
Non-Marking Belts
Release Properties Belts
Specialty/Profile Belts
MAB
FAA
FAB
FAC
FAD
FAF
AAAAAC
AAD
HAA
IAA IAB IACIAD
UAA
EAA
UAB
EABEAC
UACUAD
UAE
EAD
TAA
TAB
TAC
PAAPAB
PACPAD
PAE
NAANAB
NACNAD
RAARAB
RACRAD
RAE
SAASAB
SACSAD
SAE
HABHAC
MAA
QUICK SHIP! MADMAC
AAE
HADHAE
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
22
Fixed Side Rails
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 20Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPMNote 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end
125-0169 pictured
.46 *
2.35
W - .19
W + 1.06
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sideswith wear strip
2.22
.33 *
W + 1.06
W - .61
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sideswith seals**
W + 1.06
W + .06
2.22
.33 *
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides1/3” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0153-048
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0169-096
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0170-024
Part No. 125-0169-Part No. 125-0153-
Part No. 125-0170-
125-0178 pictured
W + 1.19
W - .19
1.03 * .88
2.912.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
W + 1.19
.93 *.78
2.81
W - .61
2.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sideswith seals**
W + .06
W + 1.19
.93 * .78
2.812.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sides1” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0174-048
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0177-024
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0178-096
Part No. 125-0177-Part No. 125-0174-
Part No. 125-0178-
125-0215 pictured
2.03
1.90
W + 1.19
2.05 *
3.93
W - .18
Aluminum extruded 2” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
1.93 * 1.78
3.81
W + 1.19
2.03
W - .61
Aluminum extruded 2” high sideswith seals**
W + .06
W + 1.19
1.93 * 1.78
3.81
2.03
Aluminum extruded 2” high sides2” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0215-024
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0217-036
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125-0216-060
Part No. 125-0217-Part No. 125-0215-
Part No. 125-0216-
Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000 23
Adjustable Guide Rails
2” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesW + 9.12 MAX
W + 2.81
4.34
3.00ADJ.
W - .25 MAX.
3.25 MAX. *1.99 MIN. *
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
W - .10 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *1.13 MIN. *
1” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesPart No. 125-0281-
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
4.34
W -.38 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
5.25 MAX. *3.00 MIN. *
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
3.281.62 MAX. *1.03 MIN. *
1” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 125-0219-
3.94
W + 1.57
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *2.13 MIN. *
2” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 125-0218-
4.92
3.03 *
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
3” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 125-0222-
2-Axis Adjustable Guides125-0281-048-T pictured
Indented Guides125-0219 pictured
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominallength of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or athumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for setscrew and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
Example 125-0281-120 -T1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheeladjustment for a 120” long conveyor.
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide theproduct being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically andhorizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility.Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. Thethumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal forquick adjustments, because no tools are required.
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominalconveyor length in inches.
Example 125-0219-1201” adjustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” longconveyor.
The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts.Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 15). TheIndented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocketwhich surrounds the product being conveyed.
- Part No. 125-0282- -
Part No. 125-0283- -
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
Product Containment Accessories
Hinged Side Extenders
W + 3.25 MAX. W + 1.50 MIN.
W - .61
.33 *
W + 1.56
3.86 MAX. 3.29 MIN.
Hinged Side ExtendersFor part number see below
To Order:
Hinged Side Extenders bolt directly ontothe frame of the conveyor, and can beused in conjunction with 1/3” side rails.Only available in 24” and 36” lengths.
36” Long Part No. 125-1003-03624” Long Part No. 125-1003-024
Lane Dividers Lane DividersFor part number see below
LANES
RAILS
RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3"
QC Industries 513.753.6000
To Order:LD
Conveyor Length (in inches)
Conveyor Width (in inches)
# of Rails (1, 2, 3 etc)
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)
# of Lanes (2,3,4 etc)Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot)
Construction (S - Standard)
S
Single Tee Slot Side Assembly
Tee Slotted Extrusions
Rotate-In Tee Nut
Rotate-In Tee NutPart No. 125-0074-035 (Qty 1)
Part No. 125-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)
10-32 UNF THRU
.19
.86
.25
Single Tee SlotMulti Tee Slot Side Assembly
.73 *
W + 2.68
1.16
W + 1.50
Multi Tee Slot
W + 1.28
1.16
.73 *
To Order:Use part number125-0074-035 (Qty. 1)125-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)
The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to holdlightweight brackets that have a thickness of.148” or under
The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with thefollowing rails and bolt on profiles:1” - 125-0174, 125-0177, 125-01782” - 125-0215, 125-0217, 125-0216Tee - 125-0225, 125-0199
Note:The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails shown on page 22,as well as the Single Tee Slot and the Multi Tee Slot extrusions shown below.
Part No. 125-0199-Part No. 125-0225-
To Order:Fill in last three digits of part numberwith the nominal conveyor length ininches. Part number includes one setas shown in drawing.
To Order:Fill in last three digits of part numberwith the nominal conveyor length ininches. Part number includes one setas shown in drawing.
ExampleLD-2-08144-12FS2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” longconveyor. One rail with two lanesmounted to the conveyor frame
Shown with 1/3” side rail with seal
24
Note:To obtain a longer length of hinged side, pleaseuse combinations of 24” and 36” lengths.However, all length combinations must equal12” less than the nominal conveyor length.
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Flared Side Rails are ideal forapplications that require a “drop zone”wider than the width of the conveyor.The rails attach to and require the useof the adjustable guide rails shown atthe top of page 23. Additionally, the usercan add other components (shownbelow) to help guide the product asneeded. Note: Flared Side Rails shouldbe ordered one size smaller than thenominal length of the conveyor.
Flared Side Rails
To Order:
Z-1004-012 12” lengthZ-1004-018 18” lengthZ-1004-024 24” lengthZ-1004-030 30” lengthZ-1004-036 36” lengthZ-1004-042 42” lengthZ-1004-048 48” length
Example:(1) Z-1004-036A set of 36” long flared side rails
The rails are sold in sets and includemounting hardware
Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL-S shownon page 23
End Stops are used in conjunction with theFlared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable downthe length of the rail. Note: End stops areavailable for the following width conveyors:8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”.
To Order:
8” 125-0234-0810” 125-0234-1012” 125-0234-1218” 125-0234-1824” 125-0234-24
Example: (1) 125-0234-10One end stop for a 10” wide conveyorequipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”and 2” cleats. End stops are equippedwith a swing gate to help contain product
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide(sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S
The Adjustable Hopper is used inconjunction with the Flared Side Rail. Thehopper is made from (2) end stops, whichare adjustable down the length of the rail.Available for the following widthconveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”.To Order:Please order a quantity of 2:
8” 125-0234-0810” 125-0234-1012” 125-0234-1218” 125-0234-1824” 125-0234-24Example: (2) 125-0234-10Two end stops for a 10” wide conveyorequipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”and 2” cleats. End stops are equippedwith a swing gate to help contain productNote: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide
AND Flared Side Rails (both soldseparately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and#Z-1004-LLL
End Stops
W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.
W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN.
4.00
45°
2.35 *
L - 5.80 MAX.
L - 4.20 MAX.
L
L .25
5.74 MAX. *4.93 MIN. *
.90
2.90
2.35 *
Flared Side Rails
Adjustable Hopper
25*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
L = length of flared side rails
L = length of flared side rails
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guideAND Flared Side Rails (both soldseparately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S,#Z-1004-LLL
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Mounts
26
Standard Mounts
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
The Tee Slot mounted versionattaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails,the single tee slot and the multi teeslot. See page 22 & 24.
Part No. 125-0181-01 (Tee Slot)*Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*Part No. 125-0181-05 (For use withmulti-tier stand)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats.Tee Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
1.25.135
W + 1.46
3.06
.34 DIA..22 DIA.
1.32
.88.59
.31
3.50
.38SLOT
1.32
1.15
.41
.13
2.06 *
Universal Raised Side Mount
W + 1.46
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
.135
1.25
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
3.50
.38SLOT
4.81
3.07
.88.59
.31
3.10
1.53
.13 5.28 *
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
The Tee Slot mounted versionattaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails,the single tee slot and the multi teeslot. See page 22 & 24.
Part No. 125-0182-01 (Tee Slot)*Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.
Tee Mount
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.Can also be used at tail end of conveyor in conjunction with drive end mounts(125-0014-00, 125-0013-00, and 125-0015-00).Cannot be used with cleated belts.
To Order:
Attaches directly to the conveyorframe. The frame has mounting holesevery 3”.
Part No. 125-0010-00*
5/16 DIA.THRU HOLE
.135
W + 2.00
W + 1.37
2.04 *
1.56
4.00
3.00
.66
.22 1.00
1.60
Universal Bottom Mount
Notes:Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface.Cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.
5/16-18SET SCREW
.257 DIA.THRU HOLE
11/32 DIA.
2.89 *
W - 1.50
W + 1.50
W - .75 W + 1.00
.43
.63
1.25 .16 .84
To Order:Attaches directly to the underside ofthe conveyor frame. To order, use thepart number below and fill in thenominal conveyor width in inches forthe last two digits.
Part No. 125-0011-WW *
Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125-0182-04 pictured
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
Example: 125-0011-04*Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wideconveyor
125-0181-04 pictured
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 27
Standard Mounts
To Order:This mount uses existing throughholes on the conveyor that arelocated 6.06” from the tail end and8.5” or 14.5” from the drive end,depending on which gearmotorselection is chosen. This will mountthe conveyor to a flat surface. Toorder, use the part number belowand fill in the nominal conveyor widthin inches for the last two digits.
Notes:Mounts cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly.Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.
3/8-16CAP SCREW W + 1.00.38
.93 *.63
Self-Aligning Bottom Clamp Mount
Notes:Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive.Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.
BRACKET BY CUSTOMER3/8 MAX. THICKNESS
3.38
1.34 2.75 2.70 MAX.
.94 .63 W + 1.75
Self-Aligning Top Clamp Mount
Notes:Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive.Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.
BRACKET BY CUSTOMER3/8 MAX. THICKNESS
3.38
1.34 2.75 2.70 MAX.
.94 .63 W + 1.75
Rod Clamp Mount
Drive End Mount9/32 DIA. THRU
3.381.00
2.001.34
2.061.41
W + 1.75.63
W + 1.13
Notes:Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive.Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.
5/16-18CAP SCREW
W + 1.75
.93 *.63
Standard method formounting to stands(fasteners included)
Alternate method formounting (fasteners not included) Part No. 125-0116-WW*
Example: 125-0116-06*Rod Clamp Mount for 6”wider conveyor
To Order:These mounts are primarily intended toprovide precise alignment when mounted toa common flat surface, or for multipleconveyors utilizing a common drive shaft.See gang drive page 41.
*This mount replaces either right hand orleft hand mount and allows mounting of aside drive.
To Order:For applications where rapid alignmentand rigid mounting of conveyors isrequired. These clamp mounts providean economical and practical approach torapid bolster mounting of gang drivenconveyors. See gang drives pg. 41.
*This mount replaces either right hand or lefthand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.
To Order:For applications where rapid alignmentand rigid mounting of conveyors isrequired. These clamp mounts areideal for quick die change systemssince the conveyors can be installedinto the dies prior to being inserted intothe press. See gang drives pg. 41.
TYPE PART NO.
LEFT HANDRIGHT HANDUNIVERSAL*
125-0102-TL125-0103-TR125-0117-TU
*This mount replaces either right hand or lefthand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.
TYPE PART NO.
LEFT HANDRIGHT HANDUNIVERSAL*
125-0103-BL125-0102-BR125-0117-BU
TYPE PART NO.
LEFT HANDRIGHT HANDUNIVERSAL*
125-0014-00125-0013-00125-0015-00
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Stands
28
Stand Widths - WW (in inches)
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet
WW
H1 - H2
H1 - H2
WW
WW
H1- H2
48”
WW
H1- H2
H1 - H2(in inches)
27 - 3033 - 3639 - 4245 - 4851 - 5457 - 60
12 18 24 30 36
0187 H1
- - -
H2 WW
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.2) Choose stand width (WW) and enter into WW section.
NOTE: Conveyor will add 1.89” to top of belt height
NOTE: Adjustable side mounts are required to attach theconveyors to the stand. Use Part No. 125-0181-05
NOTE: *Stand width must be at least 4” greater than the width ofthe top tier conveyor and/or at least 8” greater than the width ofthe bottom tier conveyor
NOTE: Bottom conveyors can be adjusted within 5” from the floorto within 8” of the top conveyor
Widths - WW* (in inches)
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
To order:
Part No.
Aluminum Multiple Conveyor Stands
0186 H1
- - -
H2 WW
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
2) Enter top plate width into WW section.
NOTE: Must use Rod Clamp Mount 125-0016-WW (See page27) to attach the conveyor to the stand.
NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor
To order:
Part No.
Steel Stands with Stabilizers
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
2) Enter top plate width into WW section.
NOTE: Mounts are required to attach the conveyor to the stand.See mount pages 26 & 27 for details
NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
16 - 2423 - 3635 - 4847 - 60
Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches)
08 14 21 27
H1 - H2
0184 H1
- - -
H2 WWTo order:Part No.
Steel Telescoping Conveyor Stands
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
06 - 0909 - 1212 - 1515 - 1818 - 2121 - 2424 - 2727 - 3030 - 33
33 - 3636 - 3939 - 4242 - 4545 - 4848 - 5151 - 5454 - 5757 - 60
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
H1 - H2H1 - H20182
H1- - -
H2 WW
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
2) Enter conveyor width into WW section.
NOTE: No additional mounts are required.
NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the standframework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimumheight range is 12 - 15 inches
To order:
Part No.
Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
Example: 0182 - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)
Example: 0184 - 16 - 24 - 14 (Part No. includes one stand)
Example: 0186 - 16 - 24 - 21 (Part No. includes one stand)
Example: 0187 - 33 - 36 - 12 (Part No. includes one stand)
Note: Max conveyor length is 60”
08 14 21 27
Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches)
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
18 - 2625 - 3837 - 5049 - 62
H1 - H2
QC Industries 513.753.6000 29
Part No.125-0189-00
Part No.125 - 0235 -
Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL
LLL
For use with aluminum stands only.Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt heightof 28”. The angle brace is designed for conveyors 5’ or longer. When used withcasters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Part number denotes a set;order (1) per stand.
Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” sectionabove. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to lengthbecause of stand placement variations.
To order:
024036048060072096120144
Part No.125 - 0236 -
Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL
Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” sectionabove. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.
Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to lengthbecause of stand placement variations.
To order:
To order:
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
Part No. 125-0122-04Swivel locking casterOrder (2) per standCasters can be added toeither aluminum or steelstands. Swivel locking castersincrease stand height by5.50”.Casters should only be usedwith stands that are 1/3 aswide as they are tall.
To order:
Casters
Part No.125-0074-036 (Qty 1)125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)The Swivel-In Tee Nut is idealfor mounting brackets to analuminum stand, and allowsquick mounting locationchanges.1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut isprovided for attaching accessories
To order:
Swivel-In Tee Nut
Angle Brace
Aluminum Cross Ties
Steel Cross Ties
Example: 125-0236-036
Example: 125-0235-120
Inches24”36”48”60”72”96”
120”144”
LLL024036048060072096120144
Inches24”36”48”60”72”96”
120”144”
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Drives
30
Service Factor - Chart 30-A
Serv
ice
Fact
or
5 10 7020 30 40 50 60
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 10, 14, and 18). To choose a gear motor combination thatworks best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. Theuser must know the belt speed (in feet per minute) and service factor (determined below). The steps below guide the user through this process.These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque thedrive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).
1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)
Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 10, 14, or 18). Divide this numberby 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). EnterRCDT on Line One.
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (33 or 37), and write down the drive train torque (DTT)for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timingbelt or a chain. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 37), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt.Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
Select a service class: Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct driveClass II - Moderate loads with timing belt and pulley
Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 30-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number ofstarts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplieddrive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT,then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT >RCDT. If not, then:
A) Slow down the belt speedB) Choose a wider conveyorC) Consult factory
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how touse the remaining drive pages.
1.
2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) 2.
3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.
4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) 4.
5. Determine Functionality
Starts and Stops per Hour
Service Class (I or II)
Hours of Operation per Day
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.080 90 100
24 16 8 2
Example:
Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page)100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT)30 FPM (From page 33 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed)33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)Class II (using timing belt on a top drive)8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5)33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 17SDTT = 22
20 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
Example:
Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page)300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)50 FPM (From page 37 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7)87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 50.0SDTT = 51.1
51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
Class I
Class II
QC Industries 513.753.6000 31
How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner.Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.
Drawings Voltage
Speed Mounting Voltage
Horsepower
Drive locations Sizing information
Gear Reducer
Sprocket/Timing PulleyCombinations
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Standard Duty Electric
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025
See Drive Accessory Page for optional cords, switches,and plugs
1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x)2. Above gearmotors are not UL, CSA, or CE approved3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Example: M1-S3SE
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information*
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
*A
6.47
6.47
6.47
6.47
5.89
5.89
Motor Part NumberExample: 05V-018
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
2.5 - 5.0
6.0 - 12.0
10 - 20
12 - 24
17 - 34
24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT)inch Lbs.
77
40
27
22
17
12
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Example: M1-R1SE
Voltage
V
V
V
V
V
V
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
A*
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
Motor Part No. Example:051-120 (115v 1PH [email protected] FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)
Variable Speed
*A fromdrawing
33
125 Series
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
11
18
22
30
44
88 (belt)88(chain)76 (belt)76 (chain)50 (belt)50 (chain)41 (belt)41 (chain)33 (belt)33 (chain)23 (belt)23 (chain)
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information*
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
*A
6.47
6.47
6.47
6.47
5.79
5.79
Motor Part No. Example:05V-050 (115v 1PH [email protected] TO 12.0 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Variable Speed
*A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
GMtr/Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525Conv. Sprkt
251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
2.5 - 5.0
6.0 - 12.0
10 - 20
12 - 24
17 - 34
24.5 - 49
77 (belt)77 (chain)40 (belt)40 (chain)27 (belt)27 (chain)22 (belt)22 (chain)17 (belt)17 (chain)12 (belt)12 (chain)
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information*
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
*A
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
6.45
6.45
*A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
GMtr/Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525Conv. Sprkt
251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 05V-012
Voltage
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Notes:
Fixed Speed
Fixed Speed
Side or Remote Drive
Top or Bottom Drive
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted on eitherside of the conveyor with the motorinline with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
3.50
2.50
.50
A
4.00.84
3.54
.38.16
5.57
3.50
.38
5.61
4.004.88
3.50
2.00.75
O .28
4.25
5.57
.27 1.31
1.26 A
3.08 Note:This mounting arrangement allows forthe drive to be mounted away fromthe conveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motor inline withthe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted abovethe conveyor belt, on either side ofthe conveyor, and with the motorinline with the drive pulley. Referencethe drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location
1
31
3
Front View Top View
9.50
3.50
3.39
A + .31
1.75
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
Side Drive
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
9.50
1.75
A
3.25
.33
3.50
.38
5.61
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted below theconveyor belt, on either side of theconveyor, and with the motor inlinewith the drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Front View Top View*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
Bottom Drive
Top Drive
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Standard Duty Drives
32
Torque
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
11
18
22
30
44
88 (belt)88(chain)76 (belt)76 (chain)50 (belt)50 (chain)41 (belt)41 (chain)33 (belt)33 (chain)23 (belt)23 (chain)
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information*
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
*A
6.47
6.47
6.47
6.47
5.79
5.79
Variable Speed
*A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
GMtr/Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525Conv. Sprkt
251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Fixed Speed
115VAC 1 PH
230/460 VAC 3 PH
90 VDC w/controller
90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage Key
Step 1:Choose mountingarrangement& location
Step 2:If top or bottom drivemounting arrangement,choose timing belt orchain driveNote: Each speed has tworows. The top row is timingbelt driven, and the bottomrow is chain driven
Step 3:Choose speed
Step 4:Run drive sizingcalculations listed onPage 30
Step 5:Choose voltagerequirements
Step 6:Put together two partnumbers, drivemounting package andgearmotor, by followingfrom left to right
MountingArrangement
Step 2
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4(p. 30)
Step 5
Step 6
1
3
V
D
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted on eitherside of the conveyor with the motorinline with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
3.50
2.56
.50
A *
4.00.84
3.54
.38.16
5.57
4.004.88
3.50
2.00.75
.28 DIA.
4.25
5.57
.27 1.31
1.26 A *
3.08Note:This mounting arrangement allows forthe drive to be mounted away fromthe conveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motor inline withthe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted abovethe conveyor belt, on either side ofthe conveyor, and with the motorinline with the drive pulley. Referencethe drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location
1
31
3
Front View Top View
A + .31 *
3.50
3.39 **
1.75
9.50 5.61
.38
3.50
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21
5.61
.38
3.50
1.75
9.50
A + .31 *
3.00
3.50
.33Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted below theconveyor belt, on either side of theconveyor, and with the motor inlinewith the drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Front View Top View*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page
Bottom Drive
Top Drive
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Standard Duty Drives
32
Side Drive
Remote Drive
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Standard Duty Electric
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025
See Drive Accessory Page (Page 39) for standard dutycords, switches, and plugs
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
Example: M1-S3SE
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information*
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
*A
6.47
6.47
6.47
6.47
5.79
5.79
Motor Part NumberExample: 05V-018
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
2.5 - 5.0
6 - 12
10 - 20
12 - 24
17 - 34
24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
73
63
42
34
27
19
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
S or R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
SE
Example: M1-R1SE
Voltage
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
A*
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
6.45
6.45
Motor Part No. Example:051-120 (115v 1PH [email protected] FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)
Variable Speed
*A fromdrawing
33
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM *A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
11
18
22
30
44
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information*
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
*A
6.47
6.47
6.47
6.47
5.79
5.79
Motor Part No. Example:05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6 TO 12 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Variable Speed
*A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
GMtr/Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525Conv. Sprkt
251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
2.5 - 5.0
6 - 12
10 - 20
12 - 24
17 - 34
24.5 - 49
73
63
42
34
27
19
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information*
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
*A
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
6.45
6.45
*A fromdrawing
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
GMtr/Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525Conv. Sprkt
251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 05V-012
Voltage
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
V-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Fixed Speed
Fixed Speed
Side or Remote Drive
Top or Bottom Drive
1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x)2. Fixed speed motors are UL, cUL, and CE approved; however, the variable speed motor is not3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque
Notes:
Note:This arrangement allows for thedrive to be mounted on either sideof the conveyor with the motor inlinewith the drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensionalinformation. Reference the tables to
the right for mountingpackage and gearmotorordering information. Thebox immediately leftshows the possible drivepositions.
.50
.31
.72
2.93
8.59
.38
5.17
3.50
.386.31
4.88
3.50
2.00.75
.28 DIA.
4.252.94
1.31
.50
5.23
5.93
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted away from theconveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motor inline withthe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted above the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor inline with thedrive pulley. Reference the drawingsto the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location
1
31
3
Front View Top View
9.50
1.75
2.93 *
5.12
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
3.50
.38
9.50
.33
2.56
5.12
6.311.75
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted below the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor inline with thedrive pulley. Reference the drawingsto the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Front View Top View
Bottom Drive
125 Series Pneumatic Drives
34
Top Drive
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Side Drive
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Information
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T3SA-CH1010 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Chain)
Motor Part No. Example:30A-015 (4 Vane Reversible Pneumatic Motor)
FPM*
14-144
Torque In. Lbs.See ChartSee Chart
GMtr. Sprkt2510
Belt/Chain5MCH
Suffix
SA-
Position*
1 or 3
Mounting
T or B
Prefix
M1-
Conv Sprkt2510
Motor Part Number
Example: 30A-015
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
14-144Torque In. Lbs.
See Chart Below
Prefix
M1-
Mounting
S or R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3Suffix
SA
Example: M1-S3SA
Voltage
A-
Prefix
30Ratio
015
Vane
4
Motor Information
Max PSI
80
Motor Part No. Example:30A-015 4 Vane Reversible Pnuematic Motor
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S1SATop Drive Mounting Package with Chain
Example: M1-T1SA-5M2525Motor Part No.
Ratio
015
Voltage
A-
Prefix
30
Example: 30A-015
Vane
4
Max PSI
80
QC Industries 513.753.6000 35
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM
100Torque vs. Speed
80
60
40
20
036 72 108 144
24Air Consumption vs. Speed
20
16
8
4
036 72 108 14400
1/4-18NPT
1/4-18NPT
3.21
3.42
1.59
2.10
0
20
4060
80 100
120
140
1601/4-18 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
2.001.00
.88 HEX
Speed - FPM (Output)
Torq
ue L
bs. I
n.
CFM
(Fre
e A
ir) C
onsu
mpt
ion
Speed - FPM (Output)
80 PSI
60 PSI
40 PSI
20 PSI
80 PSI
12
60 PSI
40 PSI
20 PSI
Side or Remote Drive
Top or Bottom Drive
Pneumatic
Needle ValvePart Number: 125-0034-VLV1The QC Industries Needle Valve acts as a throttlingdevice, and is sized to incrementally control the speedof the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive
Filter, Regulator, LubricatorPart Number: 125-0034-FRLThe QC Industries Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator hasbeen sized to handle the flow and pressurerequirements of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive
Typical Arrangement
1. Motor comes standard with muffler and in-line filter.2. Speed should be controlled on the exhaust of air to preserve maximum torque output and a stable speed control.3. Max speed is 61 FPM @ 80 PSI.4. Both chain and timing belt drives have the same torque rating.
Notes:
Note:This arrangement allows for thedrive to be mounted on either sideof the conveyor with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
1.34
A *
B DIA.*
3.89.87
4.14
1.77
.48B DIA. *
Top Drive B DIA.*
3.50
.38
1.37
A *9.50
1.75
1.86
5.68 **
B DIA. *
.50 DIA.
3.752.88
A * .44 DIA.
1.12
1.742.75
B DIA. *
2.88
B DIA. *
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Heavy Duty Drives
36
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted away from theconveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted above the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location
1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
B DIA.*
A *
1.37
.38
3.50
9.50
1.75 .33
1.86
5.30
B DIA. *
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted below the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View
Bottom Drive
AB
16111.395.20
16311.264.69
16V8.224.98
2519.225.19
2539.255.20
25V9.154.99
3319.016.20
3339.245.20
33V10.115.01
50113.856.15
50313.226.19
50V15.844.98
503 (ID)14.087.23
Motor Dimension ChartThe motor can be rotated in 90O
increments when attaching it to thegearbox. This allows the user flexibilitywhen deciding where the motorcapacitor and work box will be located.
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
Side Drive
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend belowgear box mounting plate and may requireshimming
QC Industries 513.753.6000 37
Sizing Information
Top or Bottom Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 161 - 50J
Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
See Drive Accessories pages (p. 38 & 39) foroptional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,cords, switches, and plugs
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon running torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only.4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-S1J0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
95 (belt)120 (chain)95 (belt)128 (chain)98 (belt)132 (chain)93 (belt) 130 (chain)89 (belt)128 (chain87 (belt)107 (chain)
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
15
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
25
GMtr. Sprkt251025102510251025103012
Belt/Chain5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
Suffix
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
Position*1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Conv Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 251-20G
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-R1G0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Motor Part No. Example:253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)
Remote Drive
FPM*
12
20
15
30
40
50
60
100
75
120
150
175
200
225
84 (belt)107 (chain)89 (belt)100 (chain)67 (belt)67 (chain)82 (belt)82 (chain)68 (belt)68 (chain)59 (belt)59 (chain)51 (belt)51 (chain)46 (belt)46 (chain)
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
251030124016251030123414
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
251025102510251025102510
40164418
5MCH5MCH
25102510
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
10
10
10
05
05
05
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
33
33
33
50
50
50
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
05
05
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V,D-
50
50
G or J
G or J
Example: 503-05J
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Motor Part No. Example:331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Heavy Duty ElectricFixed or Variable Speed
Fixed or Variable Speed
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
5.2/2.8
7.4/3.7
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.2
4.8
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
2.5/2.8
2.5/2.8
2.5/2.8
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
1.5/0.7
1.5/0.7
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.2
3.2
3.2
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
GearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Side Drive
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 38For optional AC controls, see p. 38See controller on p. 38Customer to supply controller
13VD
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.2
4.8
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
2.1/2.0
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
2.1/2.0
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
5.2/2.8
7.4/3.7
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Drive Accessories
38
2X .88 DIA. 2.50
1.253.45
8.00
6.00
5.00
5.00
3X .19 DIA.
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 1 EnclosureForward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-01 Standard NEMA 1DC Control125-0149-09* Wiring: cords & plugs
*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord fromcontrol to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).
Motor Controls
Standard DC Control
4X .18 DIA.
4.45
5.13
.34
2.84
2.40
4.57 5.73
Specifications/Features:115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULc/CEIP 20 Enclosure3-digit LED displayForward/Reverse switchRun/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttonsCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:*125-0054-5C-11-05 115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-21-05 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-23-20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-43-10 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20
Standard AC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerForward/Off/Reverse switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown DC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULcNEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerRun/Stop switchCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
QC Industries 513.753.6000 39
4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT
3.63
5.75
2.00
.72
.25 DIA.
5.13
The Motor Starter is an overload protection that alsoprovides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety.The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip toprotect against autostarting after the overload conditionhas been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection.
Specifications/Features:115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp maxUL/CSA/CEStart/Stop buttonsIP55 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38-115 115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-230 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-460 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure
Motor Starter
LOCK-OUTTAG-OUT
TURN TO RELEASEE-STOP
5.88
2.50
2.25
3.13
The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the MotorStarter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motorfor safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains astart button for restarting the motor after the pushbuttonhas been released.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEE-Stop can be locked out/includes start buttonIP55 Rated
Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter
E-Stop Accessory
3.00
2.67
3.76
2.37 2.75
3.50
2.89
2X .22 DIA.
The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out powerto the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure andmounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directlyto the side of the conveyor frame.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEIP65 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-063-WBRKT E-Stop with enclosure
Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frameRemote E-Stop
Motion Controls
Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches
Standard Duty Motor Options Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number125-0149-01125-0149-02125-0149-03125-0149-04
DescriptionFixed speed standard duty electric motor ON/OFF switchFixed speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSE switchVariable speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSEswitchFixed speed standard duty electric motor 8’ cord and plug
Part Number125-0149-05125-0149-06125-0149-07125-0149-09
DescriptionON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motorFORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
The Double Universal Joint withbearing mount is used to couple aremote mounted motor with aconveyor drive shaft when there isnot common shaft alignment. Thisassembly should be used with DriveEnd Mounts.
Note: Torque rating of universal jointat average angle of 15O (.375 offset)and 350 rpm is 125 inch lbs. Higherspeeds and angle will reduce rating.
1/2 HEX
LENGTH
1/27/ 81 1/ 4
A
B
2.50
1.62
The Single Piece Flex Coupling isused to couple the remote mountedmotor with the conveyor drive shaft.This coupling can also be used tocouple between gang drivenconveyors.
The Three Piece Flex Coupling isused to couple the remote mountedmotor with the conveyor drive shaft.This coupling can also be used tocouple between gang drivenconveyors. This coupling is used onall side drives.
Note: Use of the three piece flexcoupling may require the 1/2” hexshaft retaining collar (Part No.125-0078-026) to prevent separation.Please consult factory.
The Drive Extension Shaft can beused to gang drive multipleconveyors and/or for power take-offof remote drives.
B
A
2.0
1.06 DIA..97 DIA.
1.37
Single Piece Flex Coupling
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Drive Accessories
40
Drive Extension Shaft Support Block
1/2 HEX
2X 11/32HOLES
3.25
2.50
2.75 1.34
Double Universal Joint
CAUTION: Universal joint must be guarded.(Guarding is the responsibility of the end user.)
2X 11/32HOLES
1/8 KEYWAY3.25
2.50
2.75
1/2 HEX
1.34
1.09
0.61.40
4.88 MAX
0.75 MAX
1.69
1.50.50 DIA.BORE
1.00 DIA.
Part Number
.5 in. diameterw/keyway
125-0009-02
125-0009-03
A
.5 in. diameter
B
.5 in. diameter
.5 in. hex
*Torque Rating(Inch Lbs.)
100
100
Part Number
.625 in. diameterw/keyway
125-0135-00
125-0135-01
125-0135-07
A
.5 in. hex
B
.5 in. hex
.5 in. hex
.5 in. hex
*Torque Rating(Inch Lbs.)
114
114
114
125-0135-02
.5 in. diameterw/keyway
114
.5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter
Length Part No.
125-0005-23
125-0005-35
125-0005-47
125-0005-59
125-0005-71
125-0005-83
125-0005-95
23 in.
35 in.
47 in.
59 in.
71 in.
83 in.
95 in.
Part No. 125-0148-05
Three Piece Flex Coupling
Part No. 125-0148-00(with bearing mount)Part No. 125-0148-03(without bearing mount)
125-0009-06 .5 in. hex .5 in. hex 100
The Drive Extension Shaft SupportBlock is used to support lengths ofshaft not supported by the drivecoupling or a conveyor.
1/2” Hex Shaft Retaining CollarPart No. 125-0078-026
*Value based on non-reversing applications with anangular offset of up to 5O.
*Value based on standard duty non-reversingapplications with an angular offset of up to 1O. Forheavy duty applications, divide torque by 2.
Drive Extension Shaft
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Typical Gang Drive Examples
Bottom Drive withTwo Flex Couplings
161-50G
1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA
125-0009-03125-0005-23
1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA125-0009-03
M1-B1G0-5M2525
41
How to Order
Note 1:
This typical gang drive application shows abottom drive mounting arrangement. Thecouplings and drive extension shaft areshown on the opposing page. Please notethat the conveyor to which the drive isattached has a “D” designator in the drivepulley portion of the part number.
M1-S1J0-HEX*
1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA125-0013-00
125-0005-23125-0014-00
161-50J
125-0013-00
125-0015-00
1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA
*Non-Standard Part Number
Note 2:
This typical gang drive application shows aside drive mounting arrangement. The driveend mounts are shown on page 27, anddrive extension shafts are shown on theopposing page. Please note that theconveyor to which the drive is nearest hasan “H” designator in the drive pulley portionof the part number.
The examples above help illustrate how to assemble part numbers for typical applications. The following shows the steps neededto correctly size a gang driven application:
Step One: Add up the equivalent load for each conveyor you plan to gang drive. (Using pages 10, 14, and/or 18)Step Two: Size a drive based upon the total equivalent load from Step OneStep Three: Determine which type of drive arrangement you need: side, remote, top, or bottom (Using page 32, 34, or 36)Step Four: Change the drive pulley digit of the conveyor part number to reflect which drive arrangement you are using. "D" for topor bottom drives and "H" for side or remote drives. Conveyor Part number example: 1ESBH04-060-ADQ-MAA - The "D"designates a dual output drive pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a top or bottom drive. The “H” designates a hexinput pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a side or remote drive.Step Five: Determine the couplings and drive extension shaft needed, using the above diagrams as a guide. This information canbe located on the opposing pageStep Six: Ensure that the couplings can handle the torque requirements of the system. Reference page 40
Please consult the factory if you have questions.
Remote Drive with Flex Couplings
M1-R1G0
125-0148-031ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA
125-0009-03125-0005-23
1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA125-0009-03
161-50G
Note 3:
This typical gang drive application shows aremote drive mounting arrangement. Thecouplings and drive extension shafts areshown on the opposing page. Please notethat the conveyor to which the drive isnearest has a “D” designator in the drivepulley portion of the part number.
Side Drive with Through Shaft & Drive End Mounts
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Automation Accessories
42
Motion Detection
Motion Detection Retrofit Kit
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0335-02125-0335-03125-0335-04125-0335-06125-0335-08125-0335-10125-0335-12125-0335-18125-0335-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Drip Pans
Motion detection can be used in allapplications where it is necessary toknow the conveyor belt is runningwhile other machines are operating.QC’s motion detection systemmonitors your conveyor and provides a“belt running” signal to your machineconrtrol system or PLC.
.60
.63
SPRING ALLOWS SENSOR MOVEMENTFOR QUICK BELT CHANGE
#10-32 F.H.C.S.
PROX SENSOR
4 PIN 2WIRE CONNECTOR
4 PIN 2 WIRE RECEPTACLECLAMPED IN FRAME
.54
.75
1.00
6.06
.06
.63
.86
Installed Motion Detection Kit
(1) 4-pin two wire male connector(1) 4-pin two wire female connector(1) Mounting block and spring assembly(1) Mounting hardware kit(1) Template for mounting hole transfer(1) Detectable tail assembly(1) Proximity sensor
Includes:
Note: This kit can only be ordered for installationof motion detection into an existing conveyor inthe field
Note: Holes to be drilled in the field by thecustomer.
(1) 4-pin two wire male connector(1) 4-pin two wire female connector(1) Mounting block and spring assembly(1) Mounting hardware kit(1) Detectable tail assembly exchangedfor the standard tail assembly(1) Proximity sensor(1) Installation of sensor kit into conveyor
Includes:
Note: This kit can only be ordered with thepurchase of a new conveyor
Note: Please denote a “D” in the tail pulley portionof conveyor part number
•••
•
Compact designEasy to retrofit into existing conveyorsMagnetic proximity sensor allows fordependable operation in harshoperating environmentsProvides one pulse per tail pulleyrevolution
Electrical Specifications:Supply Voltage - 24 VDCLoad Current - 200 mA, normally open
Operating Temperature:-25O to +70OC (-13OF to +158OF)
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0340-02125-0340-03125-0340-04125-0340-06125-0340-08125-0340-10125-0340-12125-0340-18125-0340-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Features:Attaches to standard width and lengthconveyors, and is ideal for recapturingoils and lubricants.Note: Designed for use with fixed siderails that use side rail clamps and theuniversal adjustable side mount only.
To Order:Fill in the last five digits of the partnumber with the width and length of theconveyor it is to be used on.Part No. 125-0403-WW-LLL
1/2-14 NPT
1/2-14 NPT
Part No. 125-0403- -
12
1 BROWN (+)2 N/A3 BLUE (-)4 N/A
PIN CONFIGURATION
34
QC Industries 513.753.6000 43
90O Transfer Plate
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0220-02125-0220-03125-0220-04125-0220-06125-0220-08125-0220-10125-0220-12125-0220-18125-0220-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0230-02125-0230-03125-0230-04125-0230-06125-0230-08125-0230-10125-0230-12125-0230-18125-0230-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Notes:Transfer plates are not intended for use withhigh friction or cleated belts.
Discharge conveyor must be pushing.
Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.
Inline Transfer Plate
Note:Transfer plates are not intended for usewith high friction or cleated belts.
Adjustable Diverters
To Order:Part No. 125-0250-000
Adjustable Stops
To Order:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1”sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot(See pages 22 -24)
2. Using the chart below, fill in thepart number using the nominal widthof the conveyor for the last two digitsof the part number
Example: 125-0232-04End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has1” aluminum side rails with wear strip
Note:
The pivot mount attaches to the tailend of the conveyor and enables apivot point from which other devicescan lift the conveyor. Includes leftand right hand mount.
Pivot Mount Set
Note:
The rolling nosebar can be usedwith a conveyor running less than 60fpm and carrying less than 5 lbs. perinch of conveyor width.
Custom Rolling Nosebars
Note:
The adjustable diverter comes with a5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)mounting assemblies that the usercan utilize to help orient the productaround a 90O transfer.
To Order:Part No. 125-0172-00
To Order:Please denote an ‘SAF’ in the belt portionof the conveyor part number, and an ‘R’for the tail pulley part of the conveyor partnumber.
Example: 1ESBH04-048-ASR-SAF
1” Sides2” SidesSingle Tee Slot
125-0232-WW125-0234-WW125-0233-WW
Part No.
Automation Accessories
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
44
.75
.88 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE.82
1.89 *
.42
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
6.13.75
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
W + 2.33 W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please consultfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
Width 2” to 24”Length 24” to 144”Profile 1.89” highDrive Pulley 1.31” DiameterLoad Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*Speed Range up to 225 fpm*Conveyor made from corrosion resistantcomponents for wipe-down applications
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 46
•••••••
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 45
Features & Benefits
Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained
areas
• Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-bodyframe construction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steelor electroless nickel plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filledwith food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on somesurfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available inover 50 various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-artmanufacturing equipment
Tail Pulley Assembly Drive Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt trackingand is equipped with superior needlebearings with seals that are filled withfood grade grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allowsthe assembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protect bearingsagainst off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking,and is equipped with superior needlebearings with seals that are filled with foodgrade grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero downtime during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
46
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 46-A
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 46-B
Conveyor Friction - Figure 46-C
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
2550 37.5
75 7550
100
150
100
150125
200
250300
450
175
87.5
225
Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Pulling (Drive Location A&B)
Lbs.
Belt Width
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
AngleFactor
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
00.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
0.0
0.30.6
0.81.1
1.41.6
1.82.1
2.32.5
2.62.8
2.9 3.0 3.1
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
36 42 4860
7284
96
132
168
Technical Data
0
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example,demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we havedeveloped certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your applicationrequires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motorarrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (seepages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size agear motor (see pages 60-65).
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 46-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyorwidth listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drivepulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on LineTwo. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2for accumulation belts listed on page 52 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane).Enter result on Line Two.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining ordeclining applications choose a factor from Figure 46-B based upon theangle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from LineOne. Enter result on Line Three.
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent smallparts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwisemultiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found onpage 54. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factorof 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines one through four together, please referenceFigure 46-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greaterthan the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,please choose a wider conveyor or consult the factory.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factoredin, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simplychoose the value from Figure 46-C. Enter result on Line Five.
lbs.
1.
2. Accumulation 2.
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
4. Side Seals 4.
5. Conveyor Friction 5.
STOPSTOP
Note: See page 47
QC Industries 513.753.6000 47
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 52-53.
Example: 1EREH03-048-ASQ-MAA125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81”stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 3” wide by 48” long with solidoutput pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the Aposition. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
- - -1 E R H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 = 125 E = End Drive R = CorrosionResistant
E = 1.81” Stainless SteelB = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*
2”
02
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
24”
024
36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship tothe customer. Accessories such as Drives,Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packagedseparately and are shipped unassembledwith the conveyor to prevent damageduring shipment. Complete assembly canbe provided upon request; please contactour factory for details.
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output ShaftS
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.41
* 1/8” sq. key included
Note: proceed to page 54 tocontinue sizing your conveyor...
Custom colors available - Contact factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors
48
CLEAT HEIGHTSEE PAGE 51
.75.88 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE.82
1.89 *
.42
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
6.13.75
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
W + 2.33
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
W - 1.37 =CLEAT WIDTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 2” to 24”• Length 24” to 144”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm*• Multiple Cleat Heights Available• Conveyor made from corrosion resistant
components for wipe-down applications
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 50
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 49
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped with superiorneedle bearings with seals that are filledwith food grade grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allowsthe assembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protect bearingsagainst off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profileconveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 51 Step 4 for options
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals thatare filled with food grade grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in eachbearing housing allows for lubrication ofbearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design
Features & Benefits
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Corrugated sidesavailable with 1 inch cleats
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-bodyframe construction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steelor electroless nickel-plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filledwith food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on somesurfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available invarious styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desiredspacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors
50
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demandsthe conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developedcertain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load yourapplication requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 50-A
Conveyor Friction - Figure 50-C
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (seepages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size agear motor (see pages 60-65).
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Pulling (Drive Location A&B)Belt Width
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 50-B
Technical Data
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines One and Two together, please referenceFigure 50-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greaterthan the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,please choose a wider conveyor.
lbs.
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
02 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
2550 37.5
75 7550
100
150
100
150125
200
250300
450
175
87.5
225Lbs.
Factor
0.0
0.30.6
0.81.1
1.41.6
1.82.1
2.32.5
2.62.8
2.9 3.0 3.1
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
Angle
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
00.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
36 42 4860
7284
96
132
168
0
1. Nominal Load
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 50-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Eachconveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drivepushing and drive pulling applications.
Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
1.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline enter zero on Line Two. For inclining ordeclining applications choose a factor from Figure 50-B based upon theangle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from LineOne.
Enter result on Line Two.
2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 2.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in,add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choosethe value from Figure 50-C.
Enter result on Line Three.
3. Conveyor Friction 3.
STOPSTOP
Note: See page 51
QC Industries 513.753.6000 51
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
- - -1 E R H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 = 125 E = End Drive R = CorrosionResistant
E = 1.81” Stainless SteelB = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)
H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*
2”
02
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
24”
024
36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the totalnumber of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have awhole number of cleats.
Example: 1EREH08-048-ASQ-CAE016125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame.Conveyor measures 8” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. Thedrive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Step 5
Step 4
Choose a base belt material and cleat height
UAC (White Urethane)MAA (Standard Urethane)Cleat Height 5mm 19mm 1/2” 3/4” 1” w/corr. sides 1” 2” 3”
CABCBB
CADCBD
CAKCAGCAE CAF CAICAH
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship to thecustomer. Accessories such as Drives,Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packagedseparately and are shipped unassembledwith the conveyor to prevent damage duringshipment. Complete assembly can beprovided upon request; please contact ourfactory for details.
Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62”Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output ShaftS
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.41
* 1/8” sq. key included
CBE CBF CBH CBG CBI CBK
Note: proceed to page 54 tocontinue sizing your conveyor...
Custom colors available - Contact factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
52
High Friction BeltsA. Grey Diamond Top High AdhesionB. Green High Tack PVCC. Beige FDA High AdhesionD. Black Lateral Grooved High AdhesionE. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)A. White FDA Fabric AccumulatorC. Black Tight Weave AccumulatorD. Grey Textured Urethane AccumulatorE. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator
Heat-Resistant BeltsA. White Silicone Heat ResistorB. White Silicone Translucent ResistorC. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat ResistorD. Blue Nitrile Heat ResistorE. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant BeltsA. Yellow Cut ResistorB. Standard UrethaneC. Black Dimple Top Cut ResistorD. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor
FDA BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Pure White FDAD. Woven White FDAE. White FDA Urethane High AdhesionStatic Conductive BeltsA. Textured Carbon ImpregnatedB. Accumulation Static ConductiveC. Low Friction Static ConductiveD. Structured Static ConductiveTranslucent Belts
A. Green Translucent AccumulatorB. FDA Fabric Translucent AccumulatorC. Silicone Translucent Accumulator
Non-Marking BeltsA. Felt Topped Product ProtectorB. Fabric Topped Product ProtectorC. Cotton Topped Product ProtectorD. Black Elastomer Product Protector
Color Contrasting BeltsA. Gray Textured ContrasterB. Smooth Green Urethane ContrasterC. Dark Green PVC ContrasterD. Light Blue Urethane ContrasterE. Smooth Black PVC Contraster
Release Properties BeltsA. Beige Silicone Product ReleaseB. White PVC Product ReleaseC. Textured Silicone Product ReleaseD. Smooth Habilene Product ReleaseE. Smooth Silicone Product ReleaseSpecialty/Profile BeltsA. Green Sawtooth Profile BeltB. White Grooved RubberC. Stipple Top PVC ProfileD. Negative Pyramid ProfileE. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile BeltChemical Resistant BeltsDue to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Ourapplication specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
FAAFABFACFADFAF
AAAAACAADAAE
HAAHABHACHADHAE
IAAIABIACIAD
EAAEABEACEAD
UAAUABUACUADUAE
TAATABTAC
PAAPABPACPADPAE
NAANABNACNAD
RAARABRACRADRAE
SAASABSACSADSAE
SnakeskinMatte
SmoothLongitudinal Groove
Rough Top
FabricFabric
TexturedFabric
Fine TextureFabric
SmoothCoarse Structure
Smooth
SmoothSmooth
Dimple TopStructured
SmoothSmooth, Sealed Edge
MatteSmoothSmooth
TexturedRough Texture
SmoothStructured
TexturedFabric
Textured
TexturedSmoothMatteMatte
Smooth
SmoothMatte, SmoothFine Texture
SmoothTextured
SawtoothLateral Groove
Stipple TopTextured
Longitudinal Groove
FeltFabricFabricFelt
PVCPVC SoftSilicone
PVCPVC
UrethaneUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane Impregnated
SiliconeSilicone Impregnated
SiliconeNitrile RubberNitrile Rubber
UrethaneUrethane
Hard UrethaneNitrile Rubber
UrethaneUrethaneUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedNitrile Rubber
UrethaneNBR Impregnated Fleece
Impregnated PUUrethane Impregnated
Silicone
PVCUrethane
PVCUrethane
PVC
FeltSpun Polyester
CottonPolyester
SiliconeNon-Stick PVC
SiliconeHabileneSilicone
PVCNitrile Rubber
PVCUrethane
PVC
Light GreyDark Green
BeigeBlackBlack
WhiteBlack
Light GreyDark Green
WhiteWhiteWhiteBlueWhite
YellowWhiteBlackBlack
WhiteWhiteWhite
TranslucentWhite
GreyGreen
Dark GreenLight Blue
Black
BlackBlackBlackBlack
Light GreenTranslucentTranslucent
BeigeWhiteWhiteWhiteWhite
GreenWhiteWhiteWhiteGreen
WhiteWhite
Natural WhiteBlack
NONOYESNONO
HIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH
212212212194212
176176176158176
NOYESYESYESYES
0.1030.1450.0720.0830.185
YESNONOYES
NONOYESNONO
NOYESNONO
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONONO
YESYESYES
NOYESNOYESNO
YESYESYESNO
YESYESNOYESYES
NOYESYESYESNO
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMEDMED
LOWLOWHIGHMED
LOWLOWLOWMEDHIGH
MEDHIGHLOWMED
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMEDMED
MEDMEDMEDMED
HIGHLOWMEDMEDLOW
HIGHHIGHMEDMEDHIGH
212248140175
356356400300300
230212248176
212212230248176
212212158176
175248176
158176212212212
175175175302
212225212212175
212194356176176
176212140175
356356350212212
194176212176
176176194212176
176212158176
175212176
158176176176176
176158356176176
176225176176175
175175175248
YESNOYESYES
YESYESNOYESYES
YESYESYESYES
0.0540.0510.0600.054
0.0590.0510.0850.0790.067
0.0600.0750.0830.100
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONO
YESYESYESYESNO
NONONOYES
YESYESYESYESNO
YESNONOYESYES
0.0750.0750.0550.0470.050
0.0630.0800.0400.100
0.0230.0240.040
0.0600.0500.0750.0630.071
0.0700.0670.0720.098
0.0720.0590.0590.0900.040
0.1770.2100.1060.0780.175
Top
Surfa
ce D
escr
iptio
n
Top
Surfa
ce M
ater
ial
Belt
Colo
r
FDA
Tops
ide
Coef
ficie
ntof
Fric
tion
(CoF
)Sh
ort T
erm
Par
tM
ax T
empe
ratu
re (°
F)
Max
. Am
bien
t Ope
ratin
g
Tem
pera
ture
(°F)
Anti-
Stat
icAv
erag
e Be
lt Th
ickn
ess
(inch
es)
Belt
Orde
ring
Code
Belt Selection Guide
Multi-Purpose BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Option #2-Spill Edge CleatD. Option #3-Perforated Belt
MAAMABMACMAD
SmoothSmooth, Sealed Edge
Longitudinal Serrated CleatSmooth, Perforations
UrethaneUrethaneUrethaneUrethane
WhiteWhiteWhiteWhite
YESYESYESYES
LOWLOWLOWLOW
212212212212
176176176176
YESYESYESYES
0.0750.0750.0750.075
eeee
104
104
105
105
Specifications subject to change - consult factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000 53
QC Industries offers conveyor belting for awide variety of applications and industries.These pages cover a number of the morepopular belts we have provided through theyears. These belts have all been tested at QCIndustries and offer a compatible fit to the 125Series conveyors. If you have a specific needthat is not covered on these pages, please
contact one of our sales engineers directly atthe factory to discuss your applicationparameters.
To Order With Conveyor:Please use the three-digit QC belt codenumber for conveyor ordering on pages 47and 51.
Chemical Resistant BeltsDue to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our applicationspecialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
To Order Belt Only:Choose nominal conveyor width and length ininches and enter the three-digit belt code.
1E - WW - LLL -
Example: 1E-08-120-MAAStandard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120”long 125 Series conveyor
Multi-Purpose Belts
High-Friction Belts
Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)
Cut-Resistant Belts
Heat-Resistant Belts
FDA/USDA Belts
Static Conductive Belts
Translucent Belts
Color Contrasting Belts
Non-Marking Belts
Release Properties Belts
Specialty/Profile Belts
MAB
FAA
FAB
FAC
FAD
FAF
AAAAAC
AAD
HAA
IAA IAB IACIAD
UAA
EAA
UAB
EABEAC
UACUAD
UAE
EAD
TAA
TAB
TAC
PAAPAB
PACPAD
PAE
NAANAB
NACNAD
RAARAB
RACRAD
RAE
SAASAB
SACSAD
SAE
HABHAC
MAA
QUICK SHIP! MADMAC
AAE
HADHAE
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
54
Fixed Side Rails
125R-0169 pictured
.46 *
2.35
W - .19
W + 1.06
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sideswith wear strip
2.22
.33 *
W + 1.06
W - .61
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sideswith seals**
W + 1.06
W + .06
2.22
.33 *
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides1/3” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0153-048
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0169-096
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0170-024
Part No. 125R-0169-Part No. 125R-0153-
Part No. 125R-0170-
125R-0178 pictured
W + 1.19
W - .19
1.03 * .88
2.912.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
W + 1.19
.93 *.78
2.81
W - .61
2.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sideswith seals**
W + .06
W + 1.19
.93 * .78
2.812.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sides1” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0174-048
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0177-024
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0178-096
Part No. 125R-0177-Part No. 125R-0174-
Part No. 125R-0178-
125R-0215 pictured
2.03
1.90
W + 1.19
2.05 *
3.93
W - .18
Aluminum extruded 2” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
1.93 * 1.78
3.81
W + 1.19
2.03
W - .61
Aluminum extruded 2” high sideswith seals**
W + .06
W + 1.19
1.93 * 1.78
3.81
2.03
Aluminum extruded 2” high sides2” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0215-024
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0217-036
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.Ex. 125R-0216-060
Part No. 125R-0217-Part No. 125R-0215-
Part No. 125R-0216-
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see pages 52-53Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPMNote 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end
Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
QC Industries 513.753.6000 55
Adjustable Guide Rails
2” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesPart No. 125R-0282- -
W + 9.12 MAX
W + 2.81
4.34
3.00ADJ.
W - .25 MAX.
3.25 MAX. *1.99 MIN. *
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
W - .10 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *1.13 MIN. *
1” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesPart No. 125R-0281- -
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
4.34
W - .38 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
5.25 MAX. *3.00 MIN. *
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesPart No.125R-0283- -
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
3.281.62 MAX. *1.03 MIN. *
1” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No.125R-0219-
3.94
W + 1.57
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *2.13 MIN. *
2” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No.125R-0218-
4.92
3.03 *
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
3” High Indented Guide Assembly
2-Axis Adjustable Guides125R-0281-048-T pictured
Indented Guides125R-0219 pictured
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominalconveyor length in inches.
Example 125R-0219-1201” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” longconveyor
The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts.Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 51). TheIndented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocketwhich surrounds the product being conveyed.
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal lengthof the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumbwheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and(T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
Example 125R-0281-120-T1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheeladjustment for a 120” long conveyor
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the productbeing conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally,offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a setscrew or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown inthe above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because notools are required.
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
Part No.125R-0222-
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
56
Product Containment Accessories
To Order:
Conveyor Length (in inches)
Conveyor Width (in inches)
# of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc)
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)
# of Lanes (2,3,4 etc)Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot)
Construction (R - Corrosion Resistant)ExampleLD-2-08144-12FR2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” longconveyor. One rail with two lanesmounted to the conveyor frame
Custom Sides Available
A number of other side options exist tomeet the demands of a wide variety ofapplications. Please call our factory fordetails.
Lane Dividers Lane DividersFor part number see below
LANES
RAILS
RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3"
Single Tee-Slot Side Assembly
Tee Slotted Extrusions
125R-0074 pictured
Single Tee Slot
Multi Tee-Slot Side Assembly
.73 *
W + 2.68
1.16
W + 1.50
Multi Tee Slot
W + 1.28
1.16
.73 *
Part No.125R-0225- Part No. 125R-0199-
Rotate-In Tee NutPart No. 125R-0074-035 (Qty 1)
Part No. 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)
10-32 UNF THRU
.19
.86
.25To Order:Use part number125R-0074-035 (Qty. 1)125R-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)
The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed tohold lightweight brackets that have athickness of .148” or under
The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be usedwith the following rails:1” - 125R-0174, 125R-0177, 125R-01782” - 125R-0215, 125R-0217, 125R-0216
Tee-125R-0225, 125R-0199
Note:The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails, as well as theSingle Tee Slot extrusion and the Multi Tee Slot extrusion.
Rotate-In Tee Nut
R
To Order:Fill in last three digits of part numberwith the nominal conveyor length ininches. Part number includes one setas shown in drawing.
To Order:Fill in last three digits of part numberwith the nominal conveyor length ininches. Part number includes one setas shown in drawing.
LD
*Dimensions reflect use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 57
Flared Side Rails are ideal forapplications that require a“drop zone” wider than thewidth of the conveyor. Therails attach to and require theuse of the adjustable guiderails shown at the top of page55. Additionally, the user canadd other components (shownbelow) to help guide theproduct as needed. Note: FlaredSide Rails should be ordered onesize smaller than the nominallength of the conveyor.
W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.
W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN.
4.00
45°
Flared Side Rails
Flared Side Rails
L .25
5.74 MAX. *4.93 MIN. *
.90
2.90
2.35 *
End Stops
2.35 *
L - 5.80 MAX.
L - 4.20 MAX.
L
Adjustable Hopper
To Order:
Z-1004-012 12” lengthZ-1004-018 18” lengthZ-1004-024 24” lengthZ-1004-030 30” lengthZ-1004-036 36” lengthZ-1004-042 42” lengthZ-1004-048 48” length
Example:(1) Z-1004-036A set of 36” long flared side rails
The rails are sold in sets and includemounting hardware
Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLLshown on page 55
End Stops are used in conjunction with theFlared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable downthe length of the rail. Note: End stops areavailable for the following width conveyors:8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”.
To Order:8” 125-0234-08
10” 125-0234-1012” 125-0234-1218” 125-0234-1824” 125-0234-24
Example: (1) 125-0234-10One end stop for a 10” wide conveyorequipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped witha swing gate to help contain product
The Adjustable Hopper is used inconjunction with the Flared Side Rail. Thehopper is made from (2) end stops,which are adjustable down the length ofthe rail. Available for the following widthconveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”.To Order:Please order a quantity of 2:
8” 125-0234-0810” 125-0234-1012” 125-0234-1218” 125-0234-1824” 125-0234-24Example: (2) 125-0234-18Two end stops for an 18” wide conveyorequipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped witha swing gate to help contain product
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide(sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both soldseparately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL
L = length of flared side rails
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails(both sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL
L = length of flared side rails
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Mounts
58
Standard Mounts
125R-0181-04 pictured
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
The Tee Slot mounted versionattaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails,the single tee slot and the multi teeslot. See page 54 & 55.
Part No. 125R-0181-01 (Tee Slot)*Part No. 125R-0181-04 (Frame)*Part No. 125R-0181-05 (For use withmulti-tier stand)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats.T-Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
1.25.135
W + 1.46
3.06
.34 DIA..22 DIA.
1.32
.88.59
.31
3.50
.38SLOT
1.32
1.15
.41
.13
2.06 **
Universal Raised Side Mount
W + 1.46
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
.135
1.25
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
3.50
.38SLOT
4.81
3.07
.88.59
.31
3.10
1.53
.13 5.28 **
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
The Tee Slot mounted versionattaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails,the single tee slot and the multi teeslot. See page 54 & 56.
Part No. 125R-0182-01 (Tee Slot)*Part No. 125R-0182-04 (Frame)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.
Universal Bottom Mount
Notes:Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface.This mount cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.
5/16-18SET SCREW
.257 DIA.THRU HOLE
11/32 DIA.
2.89 **
W - 1.50
W + 1.50
W - .75 W + 1.00
.43
.63
1.25 .16 .84
To Order:Attaches directly to the underside ofthe conveyor frame. To order use thepart number below and fill in thenominal conveyor width in inches forthe last two digits.
Part No. 125R-0011- *
Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125R-0182-04 pictured
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
Example: 125R-0011-04Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wideconveyor
To Order:This mount uses existing throughholes on the conveyor that arelocated 6.06” from tail end and 8.5”or 14.5” from drive end. This willmount the conveyor to a flat surface.To order, use the part number belowand fill in the nominal conveyor widthin inches for the last two digits.
Notes:Mount cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side AssemblyMount cannot be used with cleated belts
3/8-16CAP SCREW W + 1.00.38
.93 **.63
Rod Clamp Mount
5/16-18CAP SCREW
W + 1.75
.93 **.63
Standard method formounting to stands(fasteners included)
Alternate method formounting to stands(fasteners not included)
Part No. 125R-0116- *
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
Example: 125R-0116-06*Rod clamp mount for a 6” wideconveyor
**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 59
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet
WW
H1 - H2
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
06 - 0909 - 1212 - 1515 - 1818 - 2121 - 2424 - 2727 - 3030 - 33
33 - 3636 - 3939 - 4242 - 4545 - 4848 - 5151 - 5454 - 5757 - 60
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
H1 - H2H1 - H20182R
H1- - -
H2 WW
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.*Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
2) Enter conveyor width into WW section.
NOTE: No additional mounts are required.
NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the standframework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimumheight range is 12 - 15 inches.
To order:
Part No.
Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
Example: 0182R - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)
Stands
Stainless Steel Tubular Stand
Casters
Part No.125-0074-036 (Qty 1)125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal formounting brackets to an aluminumstand, and allows quick mountinglocation changes.Note: Swivel-In Tee Nut is zinc plated1/4-20 thread-in Tee Nut isprovided for attaching accessories.
To order:
Swivel-In Tee Nut
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
24 - 2727 - 3030 - 3333 - 3636 - 3939 - 4242 - 45
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
H1 - H20188
H1- - -
H2 WW
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.*Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
2) Enter conveyor width into WW section.
NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts areincluded with the stand.
NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the standframework on the outside of the conveyor.
To order:
Part No.
Example: 0188 - 30 - 33 - 18 (Part No. includes one stand)
WW
H1 - H2
Part No.125R-0189-00
For use with aluminum stands only.Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt heightof 28”. The angle brace can replace cross ties for conveyors 5’ long and up. Whenused with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Order (1) per stand.
To order:
Angle Brace
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
Part No. 125R-0122-04Swivel locking casterOrder (2) per standCasters can be added toeither aluminum or steelstands. Swivel locking castersincrease stand height by5.50”.Casters should only be usedwith stands that are 1/3 aswide as they are tall.
To order:
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drives
60
Service Factor - Chart 60-A
Serv
ice
Fact
or
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.95 10 7020 30 40 50 60
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 46 and 50). To choose a gear motor combination that worksbest for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The usermust know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guidethe user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required ConveyorDrive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).
1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)
Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 46 or 50). Divide this number by 6.The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT onLine One.
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (63 or 65), and write down the drive train torque (DTT)for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use a timing belt.For heavy duty drives (listed on page 65), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drivetrain torque on Line Two.
Use Chart 60-A below based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enterthe result on Line Three.
Divide the drive train torque (DDT) by the service factor (SF). This result equals the supplied drive train torque(SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque[SDTT]) to Line 1(the required conveyor drive torque[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT,then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT >RCDT. If not, then:
A) Slow down the belt speedB) Choose a wider conveyorC) Consult factory
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how touse the remaining drive pages.
1.
2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) 2.
3. Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.
4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) 4.
5. Determine Functionality
Starts per Hour
Hours of Operation per Day
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.280 90 100
24 16 8 2
Factor
Example:
Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page)100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT)30 FPM (From page 63 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed)33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)Class II (using timing belt on a top drive)8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5)33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 17SDTT = 22
20 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
Example:
Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page)300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)50 FPM (From page 65 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7)87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 50.0SDTT = 51.1
51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
QC Industries 513.753.6000 61
How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner.Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.
Drawings Voltage
Speed Mounting Voltage
Horsepower
Drive locations Sizing information
Gear Reducer
Timing PulleyCombinations
Torque
Step 1:Choose mountingarrangement& location
Step 2:Choose speed
Step 3:Run drive sizingcalculations listed onPage 60
Step 4:Choose voltagerequirements
Step 5:Put together two partnumbers, drivemounting package andgearmotor, byfollowing from left toright
MountingArrangement
Step 3(p. 60)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T
T
T
T
T
T
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque in Lbs.FPM* GMtr/Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Conv. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
ant
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025-WD
Suffix
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CRBelt
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Drives
62
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted on eitherside of the conveyor with the motorinline with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
.50
2.507.20
.783.59 .38
3.59
.11
4.35
3.50
.45
/
4.88
3.50
2.00
.75
O .28
4.25
3.59
1.31.23
4.23
7.20 1.26
Note:This mounting arrangement allows forthe drive to be mounted away fromthe conveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motor inline withthe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted abovethe conveyor belt, on either side ofthe conveyor, and with the motorinline with the drive pulley. Referencethe drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location
1
31
3
Front View Top View
9.50
1.75
7.51
3.59
2.88
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
Side Drive
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
9.50
1.75.33
3.21
4.23
7.51
3.50
.42
3.59
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted below theconveyor belt, on either side of theconveyor, and with the motor inlinewith the drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Front View Top View*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
Bottom Drive
Top Drive
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025-WD
Gearmotors include a 6’ cord1. Motors are UL approved2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque in Lbs.
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
Example: M1-S3SE-CR
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-018-WD
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque in Lbs.
77
40
27
22
17
12
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
Example: M1-R1SE-CR
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
Motor Part No. Example:051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
88
76
50
41
33
23
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T
T
T
T
T
T
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information
Motor Part No. Example:051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque in Lbs.FPM* GMtr/Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Conv. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
77
40
27
22
17
12
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
B
B
B
B
B
B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information
AMP
1
1
1
1
1
1
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Torque in Lbs.FPM* Belt/Chain
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
GMtr/Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Conv. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Notes:
AMP
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Corrosion R
esistant 125 Series
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025-WD
Suffix
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CRSuffix
120
050
030
025
018
012
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-012-WD
63
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CRBelt
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 5
115VAC 1 PH
230/460 VAC 3 PH
90 VDC w/controller
90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage Key
1
3
V
D
QC Industries 513.753.600062
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted on eitherside of the conveyor with the motorinline with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
.50
2.567.20
.643.59 .38
3.59 4.35
.28 DIA.
4.88 3.59
2.00.75
3.50
4.25
7.20 1.23
1.32.23
4.23
Note:This mounting arrangement allows forthe drive to be mounted away fromthe conveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motor inline withthe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted abovethe conveyor belt, on either side ofthe conveyor, and with the motorinline with the drive pulley. Referencethe drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location1
31
3
Drive Location
1
31
3
Front View Top View
9.50
1.75
7.51
3.59
3.50
.45
2.88 *3.59
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
Side Drive
3.50 3.599.50
1.75.33
3.21
4.23
7.51
.42
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted below theconveyor belt, on either side of theconveyor, and with the motor inlinewith the drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1
31
3
Front View Top View
Bottom Drive
Top Drive
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Duty Drives
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025-WD
Gearmotors include a 6’ cord1. Motors are UL, CSA and CE approved2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque in Lbs.
88
69
38
32
25
18
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
Example: M1-S3SE-CR
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-018-WD
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
Torque in Lbs.
88
69
38
32
25
18
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
Example: M1-R1SE-CR
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Motor Information
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Motor Part No. Example:051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
88
69
38
32
25
18
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
T
T
T
T
T
T
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information
Motor Part No. Example:051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
Torque in Lbs.FPM* GMtr/Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Conv. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
4.5
10
18
21
30
43
88
69
38
32
25
18
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
B
B
B
B
B
B
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
Suffix
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
SE-
Prefix
05
05
05
05
05
05
Motor Information
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Voltage
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
Torque in Lbs.FPM* Belt
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
GMtr/Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Conv. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
Voltage
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
1-
Ratio
120
050
030
025
018
012
HP
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
Notes:
AMP
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-025-WD
Suffix
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CRSuffix
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Motor Part NumberExample: 051-012-WD
63
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CRBelt
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
QC Industries 513.753.600064
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted on eitherside of the conveyor with the motorperpendicular with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
4.14
1.77 **
.48 **B DIA.
1.34
A
B DIA.
3.89.87
B DIA.
3.50
.38
1.37
A
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted abovethe conveyor belt, on either side ofthe conveyor, and with the motorperpendicular with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Front View Top View
9.50
1.75
1.86
5.68 **
B DIA.
Front View Top View
Side Drive
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.
9.50
1.75 .33 **
1.86
5.30
B DIA.
B DIA.
A
1.37
.37
3.50
Note:This mounting arrangement allowsfor the drive to be mounted below theconveyor belt, on either side of theconveyor, and with the motorperpendicular with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.Front View Top View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.
Bottom Drive
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Heavy Duty Drives
AB
50113.856.15
50313.226.19
50V15.844.98
503 (ID)14.087.23
Motor Dimension ChartThe motor can be rotated in 90O increments toachieve alternate orientations when attaching it tothe gearbox. This allows the user flexibility whendeciding where the motor capacitor and gearboxwill be located.
Drive Location1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Top Drive
Note:This mounting arrangement allows forthe drive to be mounted away fromthe conveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motorperpendicular with the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.
Remote Drive
Note: 56 frame gearmotors extend below gearboxmounting plate and may require shimming
3.75 2.88
.44 DIA.
B DIA.
.85
B DIA.2.75
5.72
2.50 **
**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 65
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Side Drive
Sizing Information
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Top or Bottom Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 501 - 50J-WD
Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T1J0-5M4025-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Motor Part No. Example:501-10J-WD (115V 1Ph Gearmotor@100 FPM)
See Drive Accessories (page 66) foroptional controllers
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon running torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number (230 VAC 3 PH motors only)4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque in Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
Suffix
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
Example: M1-S1J0-CR
Voltage
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V ,D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V, D-
Prefix
50
50
59
50
50
50
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Example: M1-B3J0-5M2525-CR Example: 503-05J-WD
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
HP
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Motor Information
Face
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed -Remote Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 501 - 50J-WD
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque in Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
Suffix
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
0-CR
Example: M1-S1J0-CR
Voltage
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
Prefix
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
HP
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Motor Information
Face
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
95
95
98
93
89
87
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
15
Voltage
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
Prefix
50
50
50
50
50
50
GMtr. Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
30
Belt
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
Suffix
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
Position*1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Conv Sprkt
25
25
25
25
25
25
FPM*
12
20
15
30
40
50
60
100
75
120
150
175
200
225
84
89
67
82
68
59
51
46
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
25
30
40
25
30
34
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
25
25
25
25
25
25
40
44
5M
5M
25
25
10
10
10
05
05
05
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
50
50
50
50
50
50
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
05
05
50
50
G or J
G or J
HP
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Face
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
115/230Amp
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
230/460Amp
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
DCAmp
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
GearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Voltage
Suffix
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
-WD
Suffix
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
-CR
Voltage
Voltage
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 66For optional AC controls, see p. 66See controller on p. 66Customer to supply controller
13VD
230/460Amp
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
DCAmp
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
115/230Amp
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
115/230Amp
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
8.0/4.0
230/460Amp
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
1.6/0.8
DCAmp
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories
2 X .75 NPT56
2.12
2.20
7.20 6.35.85
.188
5.63
1.20Washdown DC Control
2 X .75 NPT56
2.12
2.20
7.20 6.35.85
.188
5.63
1.20Washdown AC Control
Drive Shaft Extensions and Couplings
A
B
2.50
1.62
Part Number
125R-0009-02
A
.5 in. dia.
B
.5 in. dia.
**Torque Rating(Inch Lbs.)
78
Single Piece Flex Coupling Drive Extension Shafts
1/2 HEX
LENGTH
1/27/ 81 1/ 4
Length Part No.
125R-0005-23
125R-0005-35
125R-0005-47
125R-0005-59
125R-0005-71
125R-0005-83
125R-0005-95
23 in.
35 in.
47 in.
59 in.
71 in.
83 in.
95 in.
125R-0009-03 .5 in. dia. .5 hex 78
The Single Piece Flex Coupling isused to couple the remote mountedmotor with the conveyor drive shaft.This coupling can also be used tocouple between gang drivenconveyors.
The Drive Extension Shaft can beused to gang drive multipleconveyors and/or for power take-offof remote drives.
125R-0009-08* .5 in. dia. .472 dia. 78
66
*For use with corrosion resistant standard duty drives only**Value based on non-reversing applications with an angularoffset of up to 5O.
125R-0009-03 couplings pictured
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerForward/Off/Reverse switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment.
Specifications/Features:
115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULcNEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerRun/Stop switchCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
90O Transfer Plate
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0220-02125-0220-03125-0220-04125-0220-06125-0220-08125-0220-10125-0220-12125-0220-18125-0220-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Conveyor Width Part No.
125R-0230-02125R-0230-03125R-0230-04125R-0230-06125R-0230-08125R-0230-10125R-0230-12125R-0230-18125R-0230-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Note 1: Transfer plates are not intendedfor use with high friction or cleated belts.
Note 2: Discharge conveyor must bepushing.
Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes tomount plate.
Inline Transfer Plate
Note:Transfer plates are not intended for usewith high friction or cleated belts.
Adjustable Diverters
To Order:Part No. 125R-0250-000
Adjustable Stops
To Order:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1”sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot(See pages 54 & 56)
2. Using the chart below, fill in thepart number using the nominal widthof the conveyor for the last two digitsof the part number
Example: 125R-0232-04End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has1” aluminum side rails with wear strip
Note:
The pivot mount attaches to the tailend of the conveyor and enables apivot point from which other devicescan lift the conveyor.
Includes left and right hand mount
Pivot Mount Set
To Order:Part No. 125R-0172-00
1” Sides2” SidesSingle Tee Slot
125R-0232-WW125R-0234-WW125R-0233-WW
Part No.
Automation Accessories
67
Note:
The adjustable diverter comes with a5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)mounting assemblies that the usercan utilize to help orient the productaround a 90O transfer.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Z Conveyors
68
A
C
B
ANGLE°
ANGLE°
1.89
.88
.42 6.13
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
.82
.75
W + 2.33
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 8” to 24”• Length 54” to 240”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple cleat heights available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 79
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Features & Benefits
69
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designedto promote excellent belt tracking and isequipped with superior needle bearingswith seals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with thenatural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of thebelt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed topromote superior belt tracking, and is equippedwith superior needle bearings with seals thatare filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero downtime during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions tomove the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt trackingthat retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducingcosts as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available invarious styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desiredspacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturingequipment
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 81 Step 5 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with1 inch cleats
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angleidler assembly that offersusers a way to gain controlover belt tracking at theangles of incline or decline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly forbelt installation andtracking adjustments at theangles of incline or declineand locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-termperformance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured andproduced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that iswell-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at theangles of incline or decline
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Z Track
Conveyor
•
•
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series L Conveyors
70
ANGLE°
A
B
.88
.82
1.89
.42
6.13
W + 2.33
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
.75
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 8” to 24”• Length 36” to 240”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple cleat heights available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 79
QC Industries 513.753.6000
FeaturesFeatures & Benefits
7171
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designedto promote excellent belt tracking and isequipped with superior needle bearingswith seals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with thenatural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcassof the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed topromote superior belt tracking, and is equippedwith superior needle bearings with seals thatare filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zerodown time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimalconditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducingcosts as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available invarious styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desiredspacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 81 Step 5 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with1 inch cleats
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angleidler assembly that offers usersa way to gain control overbelt tracking at the angles ofincline or decline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly forbelt installation and trackingadjustments at the angles ofincline or decline and locks inthe tracking setting to ensure long-term performance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured andproduced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that iswell-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at theangles of incline or decline
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Z Track
Conveyor
•
•
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series R Conveyors
72
A
B
ANGLE°
.82
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
.42 6.13
1.89
.88
.76
W + 2.33
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 8” to 24”• Length 36” to 240”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple Cleat Heights Available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 79
QC Industries 513.753.6000
FeaturesFeaturesFeatures & Benefits
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designedto promote excellent belt tracking and isequipped with superior needle bearings withseals that are filled with high performancegrease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with thenatural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idlerend of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed topromote superior belt tracking, and is equippedwith superior needle bearings with seals thatare filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero downtime during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducingcosts as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and areavailable in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded tocustomer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-artmanufacturing equipment
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 81 Step 5 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with1 inch cleats
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angleidler assembly that offersusers a way to gain controlover belt tracking at theangles of incline or decline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly forbelt installation andtracking adjustments at theangles of incline or declineand locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-termperformance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured andproduced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that iswell-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at theangles of incline or decline
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Z Track
Conveyor
•
•
73
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series U Special Conveyors
74
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
W - .10 =BELT WIDTH
6.13
.82
ANGLE° ANGLE°
1.89
.88
B
A C
W + 2.33
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
.75 .50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
.42
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 8” to 24”• Length 54” to 240”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple cleat heights available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 79
QC Industries 513.753.6000 75
Features & Benefits
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designedto promote excellent belt tracking and isequipped with superior needle bearingswith seals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with thenatural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed topromote superior belt tracking, and is equippedwith superior needle bearings with seals thatare filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero downtime during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducingcosts as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available invarious styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desiredspacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 81 Step 5 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with1 inch cleats
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of theangle idler assembly thatoffers users a way to gaincontrol over belt trackingat the angles of incline ordecline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly forbelt installation andtracking adjustments at theangles of incline or decline and locks in the trackingsetting to ensure long-term performance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured andproduced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that iswell-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at theangles of incline or decline
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Z Track
Conveyor
•
•
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series N Special Conveyors
76
Specifications
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
W - .10 BELT
ANGLE° ANGLE°
6.131.89
.82.88
.42
B
.75
W + 2.33
1.00 SHAFTLENGTH
.50 DIA.1/8 SQ. KEY
A C
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 8” to 24”• Length 54” to 240”• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 225 fpm• Multiple cleat heights available
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 79
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Features & Benefits
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designedto promote excellent belt tracking and isequipped with superior needle bearingswith seals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tailassembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with thenatural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler end of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass ofthe belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed topromote superior belt tracking, and is equippedwith superior needle bearings with sealsthat are filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the driveassembly provide axial float, which allows theassembly to move with the natural camber ofthe belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows forlubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero downtime during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearingassemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditionsto move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducingcosts as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and areavailable in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded tocustomer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-artmanufacturing equipment
Multiple cleat sizes and styles availableSee page 81 Step 5 for options
Corrugated sidesavailable with1 inch cleats
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angleidler assembly that offersusers a way to gain controlover belt tracking at theangles of incline or decline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly forbelt installation andtracking adjustments at theangles of incline or declineand locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-termperformance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured andproduced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that iswell-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at theangles of incline or decline
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Z Track
Conveyor
•
•
77QC Industries 513.753.6000
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Conveyors
78
Selecting the Frame Arrangement Pages 78 through 81 should be used to size, select, and compilea part number. Please use the steps below to begin the process
ZSee steps below
LSee steps below
RSee steps below
UConsult Factory
NConsult Factory
1a
1b
2a
2b
3
4
a
b
c
y
xA°
Q
To Determine the Conveyor Floor Length Run**This section is provided to allow the user to determine the overall floor space. It is not necessary information for placing an order.
Choose an infeed height
Choose an infeed length (if Z or L)in 6” increments
1a
1b
1a
1b
Example
12”
24”
Choose a discharge height
Choose a discharge length (if Z or R)in 6” increments
2a
2b
2a
2b
48”
18”
Determine rise (the difference betweenthe discharge and infeed heights)in inches 3 3
Select the angle and enter the constantfrom the table below
4 4Angle 30O 45O 60O 75O 90O
Constant (K) .5 .7 .87 .97 1
Determine the last frame section length
(Rise/K) + 2
Choose a frame length in 6” increments
5
5
48”-12”36”
36”
45O .7
(36 / .7) + 2 = 53.4
54”
2a
Recalculate discharge height
((Step 5 - 2) * K) + 1a
If new height is not acceptable, choose a different length (in 6” increments) for the center frame section andrecalculate. If the center frame section is changed, pleasecheck the discharge length in step 2b for proper distance.
2a
2a 48.4”
(Round up toa 6” increment)
Use the values from 1b, 2b, and 5 in the length section of the conveyor part number. See page 80.
Key
a = a frame lengthb = b frame lengthc = c frame lengthy = risex = runAO = angleQ = overall length
1) Solve for X X = b2 - y2
2) Solve for Q
542 - 362 = 40.251)2) 24
+40.25+18- 6=76.25
Example for Z
For a Z:For an L:For an R:
Q = (A + X + C) - 6Q = (A + X) - 4Q = (B + X) -4
2a - 1a
(Revised)
((54 - 2) * .7) + 12 = 48.4
QC Industries 513.753.6000 79
All applications require certain performance characteristics from the conveyor.QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses theseparameters into a common factor called Equivalent Load. For instance, aconveyor application that is carrying a 5 lb. load up an incline is required tomove a load equivalent to more than merely the 5 lbs. of product placed uponthe belt.
Please follow the 3 steps below to determine the Equivalent Load foryour application. These results will then be used to properly size the torquerequirement for the gearmotor arrangement. (pages 86-89).
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 79-A
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 79-B
Conveyor Friction - Figure 79-C
Write down the equivalent load on the application data sheet (found in theback of the catalog). The equivalent load is needed to properly size agearmotor for the conveyor. (Ref. Gearmotors pages 86-89)
Example:50 lbs. (Step 1)
+115 lbs (Step 2)+ 96 lbs (Step 3)
261 lbs Equivalent Load
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the belt part number.
150
135
120
105
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
8 10 12 18 24
67
125
Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Pulling (Drive Location A&B)
Lbs.
Belt Width
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
AngleFactor
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
1.6 2.3 2.8 3.130 45 60 75
1.6
2.3
2.83.1
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
200
150
100
50
8 10 12 18 24
72 84 96 132 168
72 84 96
132
168
Technical Data
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load SUM (1 thru 3)
Enter the load (in pounds) that the conveyor must carry on Line 1.
Use Figure 79-A to cross-reference the load calculation with the conveyor’sload carrying capacity; drive pulling or drive pushing.
Example: Product is a box weighing 2 lbs. There will be 25 boxes on theconveyor at any one time. 2 lbx x 25 = 50 lb. load. Conveyor width is 12inches, which is capable of carrying 125 lbs. pulling. (Ref. Figure 79-A)
These applications utilize an incline or decline. Choose a factor fromFigure 79-B based upon the angle of incline/decline, then multiply thatfactor by the total nominal load from Line 1 above. Enter the result onLine 2.
Example: 50 lb. (nominal load) x 2.3 (45O factor) = 115 lb. load equivalent
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be factored into theload. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, either add4 to the conveyor’s width, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the valuefrom Figure 79-C. Enter the result on Line 3.
Example: 4 + 12 (Conv Width) x 6 = 96 lb. load equivalent (Ref. Fig. 79-C)
lbs.
0
1.
2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 2.
3. Frictional Load 3.
67
125
67
125
67
125
67
125
3.490
3.4
Note: See page 81
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Z Conveyors
80
How to Order
Step 1
Step 2
- - -1 E S
SeriesD
rive Type
Construction
Frame
Frame StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive Location
Drive PulleyTail Pulley
1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Z = Z FramesR = R FramesL = L Frames
Lengths
Step 1 Step 4
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
Step 3Step 2
Angle
LengthLengthLengthLength
LengthLength
Belt
Belt
Belt
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Step 3
ASection
BSection
CSection
Widths
Width
8”
10”
12”
18”
24”
Note: The nominal width ofthe conveyor is not usablebelt space. Please refer tothe drawings and table todetermine a width for yourapplication. Option A showsa cleated belt withadjustable guide rails (seepage 82) while option Bshows a cleated belt withcorrugated sidewall (seepage 81)
Order Code
08
10
12
18
24
A- Maximum Part Width
4.20”
6.20”
8.20”
12.92”
18.92”
Cleat width when using side rails Cleat width when using corrugated sidewall
B - Maximum Part Width
3.56”
5.56”
7.56”
12.24”
18.24”
18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72” 78” 84” 90” 96” 102” 108” 114” 120” 126” 132”Order Code 018 024 030 036 042 048 054 060 066 072 078 084 090 096 102 108 114 120 126 132
Note: Use the valuesdetermined on page 78.
Note: Total frame sectionsshould not exceed 20’.a + b + c <=20’
Step 5 Step 6
a AO b c a AO b a AO b
Angle for AO 30O 45O 60O 75O 90O
Order Code B C D E F by
x°
Q
Example Length:024C054018
54”
18”
45O
A B
Angle
Frame Lengths for a, b, and c
For U & N frame styles, contact factoryCustom colors available - contact factory
24”
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Example: 1ESBZ12-024C054018-BSQ-ZAG031125 Z Series conveyor with powder coated frame, “Z” style, 12” wide with 24” horizontal section inclining at 45O for54”, changing to a horizontal section for 18”. Drive is located in position “B” using a standard drive pulley andstandard tail pulley. Belt is a standard urethane belt with (31) 1” high cleats on approximately 6” cleat-to-cleat centers.
Step 4
Step 5
Drive Location
D
B
A
C
How to Order (continued)
81
Step 6
Choose three digit belt ordering code
.132.00
20˚
1"
.203.00
.20
2.00
.20
1.00
.20
.75.50
.20
1/2” High Cleat 3/4” High Cleat 1” High Cleat 2” High Cleat 3” High Cleat2” High
Angled Cleat
1” High CorrugatedSidewall with1” High Cleat
Example: ZAG = 1” Cleat Height ZAE ZAF ZAG ZAI ZAK ZAJ ZAH*
*Max. incline/decline angle for corrugated sidewall 60O
Example:a = 24”, b = 36”, c = 24” Cleat spacing desired = 6”Overall belt length = (24 + 36 + 24) x 2 = 168 - 8 = 160Total # of cleats is 160/6 = 27 (rounded to nearest odd number)
As standard, we assemble theconveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality checkevery conveyor before we shipto the customer. Certainconveyor lengths andconfigurations will shipunassembled. Accessoriessuch as Drives, Stands, Mounts,and Guides are packagedseparately and are shippedunassembled with the conveyorto prevent damage duringshipment. Complete assemblycan be provided upon request;please contact our factory fordetails.
Determine endless belt length (Solve for N)((a + b + c) x 2) - 8 = N
Determine number of cleatsN/ Desired spacing
Example: 160/6= 27
1)
Determine endless belt length (Solve for N)((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N
Determine number of cleatsN/Desired spacing
2)
Determine endless belt length (Solve for N)((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N
Determine number of cleatsN/ Desired spacing
1)
2)
1)
2)
Determine the Number of Cleats
Z
L
R
Order Code Example: ZAG027
Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type
1/2” Dia*Cap
Solid Output ShaftS
D1/2” Dia*1/2” Dia*
Dual Output
QStandard
DDetectable
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
Option
see p
g.42
* 1/8” sq. key included
W + 2.81
W + 5.95
W - 3.27*W - 4.55**
2.50 MAX. 1.13 MIN.
W + 2.81
W + 5.95
4.34
W - 3.55*W - 4.83**
5.25 MAX. 3.00 MIN.
2-Axis Adjustable Guides
When the end user requires a conveyor with corrugatedsidewall belting and a flared side, end chute or hopper, thisguide rail is needed. It provides a 2” high side rail and thenecessary mounting to support the flared sides, end chutesand hopper (sold separately - reference page 83). Theguiderail incorporates a 2-axis adjustment that allows raisingthe side rail above the corrugated sidewall, providing aprecise “drop zone” into the cleat pocket.
To Order:
Part Number:125-0282-LLL-S* 2” high 2-Axis Adjustable Guide Rail
*The guide rail length should equal the length of the flared side rail,which is ordered separately (reference page 83). The guide rail is onlyrequired on the infeed frame a-section (reference conveyor ordering -page 80).
The Adjustable Side Rails are used when a guide isrequired to run the length of the conveyor. Adjustable guiderails are available in 1”, 2”, and 3” heights. The 2” and 3”guide may be used in conjunction with the Flared Sides,End Stop and Hopper (sold separately - reference page83).
Part Number Key
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Adjustable Guide Rails
82
**
W + 4.31
W - 4.43 *
W + .31
W - 5.71
W + 5.95
W + 2.81
4.34
W - 3.42*W - 4.70**
3.25 MAX.1.99 MIN.
Infeed Guide
a,b,c = Frame Sections
aaa = a Section Lengthbbb = b Section Lengthccc = c Section Length*
*Not necessary for R or Lconveyors
A = Angle
B = 30O
C = 45O
D = 60O
E = 75O
F = 90O
For use with corrugated sidewallbelting
1” H Guide AssemblyPart# Z-0281- (see table at right)
2” H Guide AssemblyPart# Z-0282- (see table at right)
3” H Guide AssemblyPart# Z-0283- (see table at right)
* For 8” - 12” conveyors** For 18” - 24” conveyors
To Order:
1” Z-0281-ZA aaa bbb ccc2” Z-0282-ZA aaa bbb ccc3” Z-0283-ZA aaa bbb ccc
1” Z-0281-RA aaa bbb2” Z-0282-RA aaa bbb3” Z-0283-RA aaa bbb
1” Z-0281-LA aaa bbb2” Z-0282-LA aaa bbb3” Z-0283-LA aaa bbb
R
L
Z
Example: Z-0281-ZB0360720018
1” high guide assembly for a 30O Z style conveyorthat has a 36” infeed, 72” rise, and 18” discharge
For use with cleated belting withoutcorrugated sidewall
Adjustable Guide Rails
* For 8” - 12” conveyors** For 18” - 24” conveyors
* For 8” - 12” conveyors** For 18” - 24” conveyors
* For 8” - 12” conveyors** For 18” - 24” conveyors
QC Industries 513.753.6000 83
Flared Side Rails are ideal forapplications that require a “drop zone”wider than the width of the conveyor.The flared side rails attach to the 2-AxisAdjustable Guides or the Infeed Guiderails, sold separately and shown onpage 82.
2.00 MAXCLEAT HEIGHT
*
*W + 2.38
W - 3.42
W + .31
4.98
45°
L
W - 4.70
W + 1.10
Flared Side Rails*
To Order:
Z-1004-012 12” lengthZ-1004-018 18” lengthZ-1004-024 24” lengthZ-1004-030 30” lengthZ-1004-036 36” lengthZ-1004-042 42” lengthZ-1004-048 48” length
Example:(1) Z-1004-024A set of 24” long flared side rails
Note: Flared sides must be at least 6” shorterthan the frame section length
* End Stops must be mounted to flaredsides as shown above. Flared sides soldseparately.
Hopper assemblies are created byordering (2) End Stops. The stops canbe easily placed anywhere along thelength of the flared rails to create ahopper of varying size.
To Order:Order a quantity of (2) to make a hopper
Width Part No. Part No.*8” Z-0234-08 Z-0234-CSW-08
10” Z-0234-10 Z-0234-CSW-1012” Z-0234-12 Z-0234-CSW-1218” Z-0234-18 Z-0234-CSW-18 24” Z-0234-24 Z-0234-CSW-24*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW”when your conveyor utilizes a CorrugatedSidewall belt material.
Example:Z-0234-12 (Quantity: 2)Two end stops, which create a hopper fora conveyor without a corrugated sidewallbelt
Flared Side Rails & Hoppers
End Stops*
Adjustable Hopper*
* Hopper must be mounted to flared sidesas shown above. Flared sides soldseparately.
1.00 MAX CLEAT& C.S.W. HEIGHT
*
*W + 1.38
W - 4.4445°
5.94
W + .31
L
W - 5.72
W + .10
*
* W + .31
W + 3.75
W - 3.50
5.06
2.9020°W + 2.47
W - 4.78
*
*
W + .31
W + 2.75W + 1.47
6.03
W - 4.50W - 5.78
3.1020°
3.10
L
3.10
*18” and 24” wide conveyors only
*18” and 24”wide conveyors
only
2.90
L
2.90
*18” and 24” wide conveyors only
*18” and 24”wide conveyors
only
*Flared Sides must be mounted to the2-Axis Adjustable Guides soldseparately on pg. 82.
End Stops are used in conjunction with theFlared Side Rails. Stops are adjustabledown the length of the Flared Rail andinclude a UHMW flap to help prevent partsfrom dropping off the end of the conveyor.
To Order:Width Part No. Part No.*
8” Z-0234-08 Z-0234-CSW-0810” Z-0234-10 Z-0234-CSW-1012” Z-0234-12 Z-0234-CSW-1218” Z-0234-18 Z-0234-CSW-18 24” Z-0234-24 Z-0234-CSW-24*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW”when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewallbelt material. (Belt ordering code: ZAH)
Example:Z-0234-12One end stop for a conveyor without acorrugated sidewall belt
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Stands
84
Cross Ties - Available LengthsLLL024036048060072096120144
To order:
Aluminum Cross Ties
Inches24”36”48”60”72”96”
120”144”
Part No.125 - 0235 -
LLL
Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” sectionabove. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to lengthbecause of stand placement variations.
Example: 125-0235-024
Aluminum cross ties are used when infeed height isabove 18”. For heights below 18”, use the Z crossbrace (see page 85).
With FeetDischarge StandCross TieInfeed Stand
To Order:
Prefix2234
2234
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
Type*F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
Low TOB**9-
12-
15-
18-
21-
24-
27-
30-
33-
36-
High TOB**12-
15-
18-
21-
24-
27-
30-
33-
36-
39-
Width***WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW*Feet or Caster ***Nominal Conveyor Width
Infeed Stand Legend Discharge Stand Legend
Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights greater than 9”)
Prefix2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
Type*F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
Low TOB**24-
27-
30-
33-
36-
39-
42-
45-
48-
51-
54-
High TOB**27-
30-
33-
36-
39-
42-
45-
48-
51-
54-
57-
Width***WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW*Feet or Caster **Nominal Conveyor Width
Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below:
Example: 2234F-12-15-10Aluminum stand with feet for 10” wide conveyor with infeed of 12” to 15”
Example: 2233C-30-33-12Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 30” to 33”
Infeed
Discharge
**TOB = Top of Belt
**TOB = Top of Belt
Note:Infeed stand legs with prefix 2234 extend beyond theconveyor framework
QC Industries 513.753.6000
L
Y
Z Cross Brace
Z Cross Braces are used when the conveyor’s infeed height isbelow 18”. When it is above 18”, use Aluminum Cross Tie (seepage 84).
Specifications:1) Z and R style conveyors: Y 36” (ref. drawing)
Use the 18” Z Cross BraceY > 36 and 54” (ref. drawing)Use the 36” Z Cross Brace
2) L style conveyors (all): Use the 18” Z Cross Brace
To Order:Part Number:Z-0235-018 18” Z Cross BraceZ-0235-035 36” Z Cross Brace
85
Discharge StandZ Cross BraceInfeed Stand
Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights 9” or less)
Infeed
Discharge
With Caster
To Order:
Prefix2235
2235
Type*F or C-
F or C-
Low TOB**3-
6-
High TOB**6
9*Feet or Caster
Infeed Stand Legend Discharge Stand Legend
Prefix2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
2233
Type*F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
F or C-
Low TOB**15-
18-
21-
24-
27-
30-
33-
36-
High TOB**18-
21-
24-
27-
30-
33-
36-
39-
Width***WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW
WW*Feet or Caster ***Nominal Conveyor Width
Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below:
Example: 2235F-3-6Aluminum stand with feet for any conveyor with infeed of3” to 6”
Example: 2233C-36-39-12Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 36”to 39”
**TOB = Top of Belt
**TOB = Top of BeltNote:Infeed stand legs extend beyond the conveyor framework
<=
<=
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Drives
86
Service Factor - Chart 86-A
Serv
ice
Fact
or
5 10 7020 30 40 50 60
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data page (page 79). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for theapplication, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know thebelt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user throughthis process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) andthe torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).
1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)
Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from page 79). Divide this number by 6. Theresult equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.
Choose the belt speed from page 89, and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Pleasenote that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. The drive traintorque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
Select a service class: Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct driveClass II - Moderate loads with belt and pulley
Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 86-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number ofstarts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplieddrive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT,then you have selected the proper drive. SDTTRCDT. If not, then:
A) Slow down the belt speedB) Choose a wider conveyorC) Consult factory
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how touse the remaining drive pages.
1.
2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) 2.
3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.
4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) 4.
5. Determine Functionality
Starts and Stops per Hour
Service Class (I or II)
Hours of Operation per Day
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
80 90 100
24 16 8 2
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
Class I
Class II
Example:
Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page)300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)50 FPM (From page 89 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7)87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 50.8SDTT = 51.1
51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
QC Industries 513.753.6000 87
How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner.Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.
Drawings Voltage
Speed Mounting Voltage
Horsepower
Drive locations Sizing information
Gear ReducerSprocket/Timing PulleyCombinations
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives
Note:This arrangement allows for thedrive to be mounted on either sideof the conveyor with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
1.34
A *
B DIA.*
3.89.87
4.14
1.77
.48B DIA. *
Top Drive
.50 DIA.
3.752.88
A * .44 DIA.
1.12
1.742.75
B DIA. *
2.88
B DIA. *
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted away from theconveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted above the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location
1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View
B DIA.*
3.50
.38
1.37
A *9.50
1.75
1.86
5.68 **
B DIA. *
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
Side Drive
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
B DIA.*
A *
1.37
.38
3.50
9.50
1.75 .33
1.86
5.30
B DIA. *
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted below the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
Bottom Drive
AB
16111.395.20
16311.264.69
16V8.224.98
2519.225.19
2539.255.20
25V9.154.99
3319.016.20
3339.245.20
33V10.115.01
50113.856.15
50313.226.19
50V15.844.98
503 (ID)14.087.23
Motor Dimension Chart
*42 frame motors only
The motor can be rotated in 90O
increments when attaching it tothe gearbox. This allows the userflexibility when deciding where themotor capacitor and work box willbe located.
88 QC Industries 513.753.6000 89
Motor Part NumberExample: 161 - 50J
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-S1J0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
Motor Part NumberExample: 251-20G
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-R1G0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Motor Part No. Example:253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S3G0 (Side Drive Mounting)
Remote Drive
Heavy Duty ElectricFixed or Variable Speed
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
7.2/3.6
8.8/4.4
230/460Amp1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.6/8
2.0/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.5
5
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
7.2/3.6
8.8/4.4
230/460Amp1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.3/6
11.6/8
2.0/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.5
5
Voltage
Voltage
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Side Drive
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 90For optional AC controls, see p. 90See controller on p. 90Customer to supply controller
13VD
Sizing Information
Top or Bottom DriveMounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) foroptional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,cords, switches,and plugs
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon rimmomg torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460 VAC 3 PH motors only4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
95 (belt)120 (chain)95 (belt)128 (chain)98 (belt)132 (chain)93 (belt) 130 (chain)89 (belt)128 (chain87 (belt)107 (chain)
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
15
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
25
GMtr. Sprkt251025102510251025103012
Belt/Chain5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
Suffix
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
Position*1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Conv Sprkt251025102510251025102510
FPM*
12
20
15
30
40
50
60
100
75
120
150
175
200
225
84 (belt)107 (chain)89 (belt)100 (chain)67 (belt)67 (chain)82 (belt)82 (chain)68 (belt)68 (chain)59 (belt)59 (chain)51 (belt)51 (chain)46 (belt)46 (chain)
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
251030124016251030123414
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
251025102510251025102510
40164418
5MCH5MCH
25102510
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
10
10
10
05
05
05
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
33
33
33
50
50
50
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
05
05
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V,D-
50
50
G or J
G or J
Example: 503-05J
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Motor Part No. Example:331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Fixed or Variable Speed
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
7.2/3.6
7.2/3.6
7.2/3.6
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
230/460Amp1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.6/.8
1.6/.8
1.6/.8
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5
5
5
5
5
GearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Voltage
Torque
90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controllerD
Sizing Information
Top or Bottom DriveMounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
Notes:
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
95 (belt)120 (chain)95 (belt)128 (chain)98 (belt)132 (chain)93 (belt) 130 (chain)89 (belt)128 (chain87 (belt)107 (chain)
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
15
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
25
GMtr. Sprkt251025102510251025103012
Belt/Chain5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
Suffix
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
Position*1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Conv Sprkt251025102510251025102510
FPM*
12
20
15
30
40
50
60
100
75
120
150
175
200
225
84 (belt)107 (chain)89 (belt)100 (chain)67 (belt)67 (chain)82 (belt)82 (chain)68 (belt)68 (chain)59 (belt)59 (chain)51 (belt)51 (chain)46 (belt)46 (chain)
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
251030124016251030123414
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
251025102510251025102510
40164418
5MCH5MCH
25102510
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
10
10
10
05
05
05
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
33
33
33
50
50
50
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
05
05
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V,D-
50
50
G or J
G or J
Example: 503-05J
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Motor Part No. Example:331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Fixed or Variable Speed
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
7.2/3.6
7.2/3.6
7.2/3.6
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
230/460Amp1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.6/.8
1.6/.8
1.6/.8
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5
5
5
5
5
GearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Voltage
Step 1:Choose mountingarrangement& location
Step 2:If top or bottom drivemounting arrangement,choose timing belt orchain driveNote: Each speed has tworows. The top row is timingbelt driven, and the bottomrow is chain driven
Step 3:Choose speed
Step 4:Run drive sizingcalculations listed onPage 86
Step 5:Choose voltagerequirements
Step 6:Put together two partnumbers, drivemounting package andgearmotor, by followingfrom left to right
MountingArrangement
Step 2
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4(p. 86)
Step 5
Step 6
115VAC 1 PH
230/460 VAC 3 PH
90 VDC w/controller
90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage Key
1
3
V
D
125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives
88
Note:This arrangement allows for thedrive to be mounted on either sideof the conveyor with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left fordimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left showsthe possible drivepositions.
1.34
A *
B DIA.*
3.89.87
4.14
1.77
.48B DIA. *
Top Drive B DIA.*
3.50
.38
1.37
A *9.50
1.75
1.86
5.68 **
B DIA. *
.50 DIA.
3.752.88
A * .44 DIA.
1.12
1.742.75
B DIA. *
2.88
B DIA. *
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted away from theconveyor and on either side of theconveyor, with the motorperpendicular to the drive pulley.Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.Reference the tables to theright for mounting packageand gearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted above the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location1-J
3-G1-J
3-G
Drive Location
1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Front View Top View
Remote Drive
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
B DIA.*
A *
1.37
.38
3.50
9.50
1.75 .33
1.86
5.30
B DIA. *
Note:This arrangement allows for the driveto be mounted below the conveyorbelt, on either side of the conveyor,and with the motor perpendicular tothe drive pulley. Reference thedrawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference thetables to the right formounting package andgearmotor orderinginformation. The boximmediately left shows thepossible drive positions.
Drive Location1-G
3-J1-G
3-J
Front View Top View
Bottom Drive
AB
16111.395.20
16311.264.69
16V8.224.98
2519.225.19
2539.255.20
25V9.154.99
3319.016.20
3339.245.20
33V10.115.01
50113.856.15
50313.226.19
50V15.844.98
503 (ID)14.087.23
Motor Dimension ChartThe motor can be rotated in 90O
increments when attaching it to thegearbox. This allows the user flexibilitywhen deciding where the motorcapacitor and work box will be located.
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page**Dimension reflects top of belt
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page
Side Drive
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend belowgear box mounting plate and may requireshimming
QC Industries 513.753.6000 89
Sizing Information
Top or Bottom Drive
Motor Part NumberExample: 161 - 50J
Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) foroptional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,cords, switches, and plugs
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon running torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only.4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
1J or 3G
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-S1J0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
95 (belt)120 (chain)95 (belt)128 (chain)98 (belt)132 (chain)93 (belt) 130 (chain)89 (belt)128 (chain87 (belt)107 (chain)
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
15
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
25
GMtr. Sprkt251025102510251025103012
Belt/Chain5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
Suffix
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
Position*1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
Mounting
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Conv Sprkt251025102510251025102510
Motor Part NumberExample: 251-20G
*See Drive Location Chart
Sizing Information
FPM*
12
15
20
30
40
60
120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
120
128
132
130
128
107
82
Prefix
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
Mounting
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Mounting Part Number
Position*
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
Suffix
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example: M1-R1G0
Voltage
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
Prefix
16
16
16
25
25
33
50
Ratio
50
40
30
20
15
10
05
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Motor Part No. Example:253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)
Mounting Part Number Example:M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)
Remote Drive
FPM*
12
20
15
30
40
50
60
100
75
120
150
175
200
225
84 (belt)107 (chain)89 (belt)100 (chain)67 (belt)67 (chain)82 (belt)82 (chain)68 (belt)68 (chain)59 (belt)59 (chain)51 (belt)51 (chain)46 (belt)46 (chain)
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
1J, 1G, 3Jor 3G
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
0-
251030124016251030123414
5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH5MCH
251025102510251025102510
40164418
5MCH5MCH
25102510
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
10
10
10
05
05
05
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
33
33
33
50
50
50
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
05
05
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V,D-
50
50
G or J
G or J
Example: 503-05J
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
Motor Part No. Example:331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Heavy Duty ElectricFixed or Variable Speed
Fixed or Variable Speed
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
5.2/2.8
7.4/3.7
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
2.1/2.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.2
4.8
HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
Motor Information
Face
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
42C
56C
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
5.2/2.8
7.4/3.7
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
2.1/2.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
3.2
4.8
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
4.6/2.6
2.5/2.8
2.5/2.8
2.5/2.8
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
7.4/3.7
230/460Amp
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.3/0.6
1.5/0.7
1.5/0.7
1.5/0.7
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
2.1/1.0
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.2
3.2
3.2
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
GearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
GearboxHandG or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
Side Drive
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 90For optional AC controls, see p. 90See controller on p. 90Customer to supply controller
13VD
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Drive Accessories
90
2X .88 DIA. 2.50
1.253.45
8.00
6.00
5.00
5.00
3X .19 DIA.
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 1 EnclosureForward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-01 Standard NEMA 1DC Control125-0149-09* Wiring: cords & plugs
*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord fromcontrol to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).
Standard DC Control
4X .18 DIA.
4.45
5.13
.34
2.84
2.40
4.57 5.73
Specifications/Features:115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULc/CEIP 20 Enclosure3-digit LED displayForward/Reverse switchRun/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttonsCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:*125-0054-5C-11-05 115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-21-05 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-23-20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-43-10 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20
Standard AC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerForward/Off/Reverse switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown DC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULcNEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerRun/Stop switchCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Motor Controls
QC Industries 513.753.6000 91
Motion Controls
Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches
Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number125-0149-05125-0149-06125-0149-07125-0149-09
DescriptionON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motorFORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details
4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT
3.63
5.75
2.00
.72
.25 DIA.
5.13
The Motor Starter is an overload protection that alsoprovides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety.The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip toprotect against autostarting after the overload conditionhas been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection.
Specifications/Features:115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp maxUL/CSA/CEStart/Stop buttonsIP55 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38-115 115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-230 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-460 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure
Motor Starter
LOCK-OUTTAG-OUT
TURN TO RELEASEE-STOP
5.88
2.50
2.25
3.13
The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the MotorStarter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motorfor safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains astart button for restarting the motor after the pushbuttonhas been released.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEE-Stop can be locked out/includes start buttonIP55 Rated
Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter
E-Stop Accessory
3.00
2.67
3.76
2.37 2.75
3.50
2.89
2X .22 DIA.
The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out powerto the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure andmounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directlyto the side of the conveyor frame.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEIP65 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-063-WBRKT E-Stop with enclosure
Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frameRemote E-StopNote: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series End Drive Conveyors
92
6.191.89 * 1.81
FRAME
W - .25 = BELT WIDTH
4.44
.42
39.38
W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH
L
DA = (L - D)
1.38 SHAFTLENGTH
.62 DIA.3/16 KEY
W + 4.95
.82
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
Width 2” to 24”Length 3’ to 15’Profile 1.89” highDrive Pulley 2.5” DiameterLoad Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.*Speed Range up to 360 fpmBelt is the highest point on the conveyor
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 94
•••••••
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100. Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame
QC Industries 513.753.6000 93
Features & Benefits
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturingequipment
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly isdesigned to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped withsuperior needle bearings withseals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into thetail assembly provide axial float,which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt andprotect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler ends of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcassof the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped withsuperior sealed ball bearingsthat are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into thedrive assembly back-flexing idlersprovide axial float, allowing theassembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protectbearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication ofbearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down timeduring lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assemblythough self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move theheaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
250 Series End Drive Conveyors
94 QC Industries 513.753.6000
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 94-A
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 94-B
Conveyor Friction - Figure 94-C
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2(except on the 24” conveyor).
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
3570 52.5
105 10570140
210140
210175
280350
420
630
175175
315
Pushing (Drive Location C&D)Pulling (Drive Location A&B)
Lbs.
Conveyor Belt Width (in.)
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
Angle
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
Factor 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.65 10 15 20 25 30
0.3
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.4
1.6
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
300
250
200
150
100
50
02 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
96 104 112 128 144 160 176 224 272
96
224
272
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example,demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we havedeveloped certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your applicationrequires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motorarrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found inthe back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properlysize a gear motor for the conveyor.
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 94-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total loadcarrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor cancarry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor,which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on LineTwo. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standardurethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining ordeclining applications choose a factor from Figure 94-B based upon theangle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load fromLine One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three.
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines one through four together, please referenceFigure 94-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum isgreater than the load capacity listed for the width you havechosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factoredin, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simplychoose the value from Figure 94-C. Enter result on Line Four.
lbs.
1.
2. Accumulation 2.
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
4. Conveyor Friction 4.
104 112 128144
160176
Note: See page 95
STOPSTOP
QC Industries 513.753.6000 95
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt code on page 100.
Example: 2ESBH10-SPF120-ALQ-MAA250 Series End Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powdercoated frame. Conveyor measures 10” wide by 120” long with solid outputdrive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the Aposition. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
- - -2 E S H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
LengthLengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
2 = 250 E = End Drive S = StandardB = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
Widths Lengths*2”3”4”6”8”
10”12”18”24”
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley TypeD
BA
C
*.625” Dia.Cap
Solid Output ShaftL QStandard
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under area single piece frame design.
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
How to Order
A&B are drive pullingC&D are drive pushing
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship tothe customer. Conveyors longer than120” ship unassembled. Accessoriessuch as Motors, Stands, Mounts, andGuides are packaged separately andare shipped unassembled with theconveyor to prevent damage duringshipment. Complete assembly can beprovided upon request; please contactour factory for details.
LengthLengthLength
020304060810121824
36”48”60”72”96”
120”132”156”180”
Order CodeSSSSSS011
PPPPPP924
346792333
680260666
FFFFFF604
000001000
---------
Y*.625” Dia.*.625” Dia.
Dual Output
Order Code
Custom colors available - Contact factory
*3/16 square key included
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Center Drive Conveyors
96
W - .25 = BELT WIDTH
.42
1.89 *1.81
FRAME
4.446.19
54.75
D
W + .31 =FRAME WIDTH
.82
.62 DIA.3/16 KEY 1.38 SHAFT
LENGTH
W + 4.95
L
(L - D) /2 (L - D) /2
Specifications
Note: As in allindustries, technicalspecifications willchange withtechnology updates.Please contactfactory or seewww.qcindustries.comfor the most up-to-date drawings.
• Width 2” to 24”• Length 4’ to 28’• Profile 1.89” high• Drive Pulley 2.5” Diameter• Load Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.*• Speed Range up to 360 fpm• Belt is highest point on conveyor
Overview Dimensions
*See Technical Data on page 98
Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
FeaturesFeatures & Benefits
97
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrainedareas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frameconstruction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick beltchange (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drivepackages or side rails
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturingequipment
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tailassembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics ofthe belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed tail assembly isdesigned to promote excellent belttracking and is equipped withsuperior needle bearings withseals that are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into thetail assembly provide axial float,which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt andprotect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearingswhile the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time duringlubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at theidler ends of the conveyor
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcassof the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belttracking, and is equipped withsuperior sealed ball bearingsthat are filled with highperformance grease
• Thrust washers designed into thedrive assembly back-flexing idlersprovide axial float, allowing theassembly to move with the naturalcamber of the belt and protectbearings against off-center loadconditions
• Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication ofbearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down timeduring lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assemblythough self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move theheaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belttracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Center Drive Conveyors
98
Technical Data
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 98-A
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 98-B
Conveyor Friction - Figure 98-C
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
70 105 140210
280350
420
630
175
Lbs.
Conveyor Belt Width (in.)
Equ
ival
nt L
oad
Con
stan
t
Angle
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
Factor0
0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.65 10 15 20 25 30
0.0
0.3
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.4
1.6
Conveyor Width
Frictional Load
Equ
ival
ent L
oad
300
250
200
150
100
50
02 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
96 104 112 128 144 160 176 224 272
96
224
272
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performancecharacteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizingsystem that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namelyequivalent load.
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example,demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we havedeveloped certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your applicationrequires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motorarrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found inthe back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properlysize a gear motor for the conveyor.
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
1. Nominal Load
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.Use Figure 98-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with thenominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total loadcarrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor cancarry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor,which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on LineTwo. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standardurethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does notrequire an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining ordeclining applications choose a factor from Figure 98-B based upon theangle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load fromLine One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three.
**Verify Load Capacity:After adding lines one through four together, please referenceFigure 98-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire willcarry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum isgreater than the load capacity listed for the width you havechosen, please choose a wider conveyor.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to thenominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factoredin, add (width x 8) + 80, or simply choose the value from Figure 98-C.Enter result on Line Four.
lbs.
1.
2. Accumulation 2.
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
4. Conveyor Friction 4.
104 112 128144
160176
STOPSTOP
QC Industries 513.753.6000 99
How to Order
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 100.
Example: 2CSBH18-096D096-ALQ-MAA250 Series Center Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81”powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 18” wide by 240” long with solidoutput drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the Aposition. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
- - -2 C S H
SeriesD
rive TypeC
onstructionFram
eFram
e StyleW
idthW
idth
Length
LengthLength
Drive LocationD
rive PulleyTail Pulley
Belt
Belt
Belt
2 = 250 C = Center Drive S = StandardB = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
WidthsLengths*
2”3”4”6”8”
10”12”18”24”
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type
BA*.625” Dia.Cap
Solid Output ShaftL QStandard
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design
Frame Frame StyleConstructionDrive TypeSeries
Standa
rd
Standa
rd
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,track the pre-tensioned belt and qualitycheck every conveyor before we ship tothe customer. Conveyors longer than120” ship unassembled. Accessoriessuch as Motor, Stands, Mounts, andGuides are packaged separately andare shipped unassembled with theconveyor to prevent damage duringshipment. Complete assembly can beprovided upon request; please contactour factory for details.
LengthLengthLength
020304060810121824
48”60”72”96”
120”144”168”192”240”288”336”
Order CodeSSSSS000011
PPPPP467924
46792467924
80260802604
FFFFF802604
00001000011
-----------
DDDDDDDDDDD
Length
Y*.625” Dia.*.625” Dia.
Dual Output
Order Code
*3/16 square key included
Custom colors available - contact factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Conveyors
100
High Friction BeltsA. Grey Diamond Top High AdhesionB. Green High Tack PVCC. Black Lateral Grooved High AdhesionD. Black Rough Top High Adhesion
Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)A. White FDA Fabric AccumulatorC. Black Tight Weave AccumulatorD. Grey Textured Urethane AccumulatorE. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator
Heat-Resistant BeltsA. White Silicone Heat ResistorB. White Silicone Translucent ResistorC. Blue Nitrile Heat ResistorD. White Nitrile Heat Resistor
Cut Resistant BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Black Dimple Top Cut ResistorC. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor
FDA BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Pure White FDAD. Woven White FDAE. White FDA Urethane High AdhesionStatic Conductive BeltsA. Textured Carbon ImpregnatedB. Accumulation Static ConductiveC. Low Friction Static ConductiveD. Structured Static ConductiveTranslucent Belts
A. Green Translucent AccumulatorB. FDA Fabric Translucent AccumulatorC. Silicone Translucent Accumulator
Non-Marking BeltsA. Felt Topped Product ProtectorB. Fabric Topped Product ProtectorC. Cotton Topped Product ProtectorD. Black Elastomer Product Protector
Color Contrasting BeltsA. Gray Textured ContrasterB. Smooth Green Urethane ContrasterC. Dark Green PVC ContrasterD. Light Blue Urethane ContrasterE. Smooth Black PVC Contraster
Release Properties BeltsA. Beige Silicone Product ReleaseB. White PVC Product ReleaseC. Textured Silicone Product ReleaseD. Smooth Habilene Product ReleaseE. Smooth Silicone Product ReleaseSpecialty/Profile BeltsA. Negative Pyramid Profile
Chemical Resistant BeltsDue to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Ourapplication specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
FAAFABFADFAF
AAAAACAADAAE
HAAHABHADHAE
IABIACIAD
EAAEABEACEAD
UAAUABUACUADUAE
TAATABTAC
PAAPABPACPADPAE
NAANABNACNAD
RAARABRACRADRAE
SAD
SnakeskinMatte
Longitudinal GrooveRough Top
FabricFabric
TexturedFabric
Fine TextureFabric
Coarse StructureSmooth
SmoothDimple TopStructured
SmoothSmooth, Sealed Edge
MatteSmoothSmooth
TexturedRough Texture
SmoothStructured
TexturedFabric
Textured
TexturedSmoothMatteMatte
Smooth
SmoothMatte, SmoothFine Texture
SmoothTextured
Textured
FeltFabricFabricFelt
PVCPVC Soft
PVCPVC
UrethaneUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane ImpregnatedUrethane Impregnated
SiliconeSilicone Impregnated
Nitrile RubberNitrile Rubber
UrethaneHard UrethaneNitrile Rubber
UrethaneUrethaneUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedUrethane
Urethane ImpregnatedNitrile Rubber
UrethaneNBR Impregnated Fleece
Impregnated PUUrethane Impregnated
Silicone
PVCUrethane
PVCUrethane
PVC
FeltSpun Polyester
CottonPolyester
SiliconeNon-Stick PVC
SiliconeHabileneSilicone
Urethane
Light GreyDark Green
BlackBlack
WhiteBlack
Light GreyDark Green
WhiteWhiteBlueWhite
WhiteBlackBlack
WhiteWhiteWhite
TranslucentWhite
GreyGreen
Dark GreenLight Blue
Black
BlackBlackBlackBlack
Light GreenTranslucentTranslucent
BeigeWhiteWhiteWhiteWhite
White
WhiteWhite
Natural WhiteBlack
NONONONO
HIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH
212212194212
176176158176
NOYESYESYES
0.1030.1450.0830.185
YESNONOYES
NONONONO
YESNONO
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONONO
YESYESYES
NOYESNOYESNO
YESYESYESNO
YESYESNOYESYES
YES
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMED
LOWHIGHMED
LOWLOWLOWMEDHIGH
MEDHIGHLOWMED
VERY LOWVERY LOWVERY LOW
MEDLOWMEDMEDMED
MEDMEDMEDMED
HIGHLOWMEDMEDLOW
MED
212248140175
356356300300
212248176
212212230248176
212212158176
175248176
158176212212212
175175175302
212
212194356176176
176212140175
356356212212
176212176
176176194212176
176212158176
175212176
158176176176176
176158356176176
176
175175175248
YESNOYESYES
YESYESYESYES
YESYESYES
0.0540.0510.0600.054
0.0590.0510.0790.067
0.0750.0830.100
YESYESYESYESYES
NONONO
YESYESYESYESNO
NONONOYES
YESYESYESYESNO
YES
0.0750.0750.0550.0470.050
0.0630.0800.0400.100
0.0230.0240.040
0.0600.0500.0750.0630.071
0.0700.0670.0720.098
0.0720.0590.0590.0900.040
0.078
Top
Surfa
ce D
escr
iptio
n
Top
Surfa
ce M
ater
ial
Belt
Colo
r
FDA
Tops
ide
Coef
ficie
ntof
Fric
tion
(CoF
)Sh
ort T
erm
Par
tM
ax T
empe
ratu
re (°
F)
Max
. Am
bint
Ope
ratin
gTe
mpe
ratu
re (°
F)An
ti-St
atic
Aver
age
Belt
Thic
knes
s (in
ches
)
Belt
Orde
ring
Code
Belt Selection Guide
Multi-Purpose BeltsA. Standard UrethaneB. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard UrethaneC. Option #3-Perforated Belt
MAAMABMAD
SmoothSmooth, Sealed EdgeSmooth, Perforations
UrethaneUrethaneUrethane
WhiteWhiteWhite
YESYESYES
LOWLOWLOW
212212212
176176176
YESYESYES
0.0750.0750.075
eeee
104
104
105
105
Specifications subject to change - consult factory
QC Industries 513.753.6000 101
QC Industries offers conveyor belting for awide variety of applications and industries.These pages cover a number of the morepopular belts we have provided through theyears. These belts have all been tested at QCIndustries and offer a compatible fit to the 250
Series conveyors. If you have a specific needthat is not covered on these pages, pleasecontact one of our sales engineers directly atthe factory to discuss your applicationparameters.
Chemical Resistant BeltsDue to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our applicationspecialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approachdelivers the best possible product for the application.
To Order With Conveyor:Please use the three-digit QC belt codenumber for conveyor ordering on pages95 and 99.
Multi-Purpose Belts
High-Friction Belts
Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)
Cut-Resistant Belts
Heat-Resistant Belts
FDA/USDA Belts
Static Conductive Belts
Translucent Belts
Color Contrasting Belts
Non-Marking Belts
Release Properties Belts
Specialty/Profile Belts
MAB
FAA
FAB
FAD
FAF
AAAAAC
AAD
HAA
IAB IACIAD
UAA
EAA
UAB
EABEAC
UACUAD
UAE
EAD
TAA
TAB
TAC
PAAPAB
PACPAD
PAE
NAANAB
NACNAD
RAARAB
RACRAD
RAE
SAD
HAB
MAA
QUICK SHIP! MAD
AAE
HADHAE
250 Series Side & Guide Rails
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 100Note 2: All rails are sold in setsNote 3: Side Rails do not run the full length of conveyor. They are indented 1 11/16” from either end
Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory
250-0153 pictured
.46 *
2.35
W - .19
W + 1.06
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sideswith wear strip
W + 1.06
W + .06
2.22
.33 *
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides1/3” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0153-048 (Center or End Drive Rail)
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0170-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)
Part No. 250-0153-Part No. 250-0170-
250-0178 pictured
W + 1.19
W - .19
1.03 * .88
2.912.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
W + 1.19
.93 * .78
2.812.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sides1” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0174-048 (Center or End Drive Rail)
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0178-096 (Center or End Drive Rail)
Part No. 250-0174- Part No. 250-0178-
250-0215 pictured
2.03
1.90
W + 1.19
2.05 *
3.93
W - .18
Aluminum extruded 2” high sideswith wear strip
W + .06
W + 1.19
1.93 * 1.78
3.81
2.03
Aluminum extruded 2” high sides2” Side Rails
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0215-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the partnumber with the nominal conveyorlength in inches.
Ex. 250-0216-060 (Center or End Drive Rail)
Part No. 250-0215- Part No. 250-0216-
102 QC Industries 513.753.6000
Fixed Side Rails
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Adjustable Guide Rails
103
2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides
W + 9.12 MAX
W + 2.81
4.34
3.00ADJ.
W - .25 MAX.
3.25 MAX. *1.99 MIN. *
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
W - .10 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *1.13 MIN. *
1” High 2-Axis Adjustable GuidesPart No. 250-0281-
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX.
4.34
W - .38 MAX.3.00
ADJ.
5.25 MAX. *3.00 MIN. *
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
3.281.62 MAX. *1.03 MIN. *
1” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 250-0219-
3.94
W + 1.57
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *2.13 MIN. *
2” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 250-0218-
4.92
3.03 *
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
3” High Indented Guide AssemblyPart No. 250-0222-
2-Axis Adjustable Guides250-0281-048-T pictured
Indented Guides250-0219 pictured
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominallength of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or athumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for setscrew and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
Example 250-0281-120 -T1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheeladjustment for a 120” long conveyor
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide theproduct being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically andhorizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility.Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. Thethumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal forquick adjustments, because no tools are required.
To Order:Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominalconveyor length in inches.
Example 250-0281-1201” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” longconveyor
- Part No. 250-0282- -
Part No. 250-0283- -
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Automation Accessories
104
To Order:
LD
Conveyor Length (in inches)
Conveyor Width (in inches)
# of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc)
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)
# of Lanes (2,3,4 etc)Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot)
Construction (S - Standard)
ExampleLD-2-08144-12FS2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” longconveyor. One rail with two lanesmounted to the conveyor frameLane Dividers Lane Dividers
For part number see box to right
LANES
RAILS
RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3"
S
90O Transfer Plate
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0230-02125-0230-03125-0230-04125-0230-06125-0230-08125-0230-10125-0230-12125-0230-18125-0230-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Note 1: Transfer plates are not intendedfor use with high friction belts.Note 2: Discharge conveyor must bepushingNote 3: Customer to drill screw holes tomount plate
Conveyor Width Part No.
125-0220-02125-0220-03125-0220-04125-0220-06125-0220-08125-0220-10125-0220-12125-0220-18125-0220-24
2 in.3 in.4 in.6 in.8 in.10 in.12 in.18 in.24 in.
Inline Transfer Plate
Note:Transfer plates are not intended for usewith high friction belts
Adjustable Stops
To Order:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1”sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot(See page 102)
2. Using the chart below, fill in thepart number using the nominal widthof the conveyor for the last two digitsof the part number
Example: 125-0232-04End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has1” aluminum side rails
1” Sides2” SidesSingle Tee Slot
125-0232-WW125-0234-WW125-0233-WW
Part No.
Adjustable Diverters
To Order:Part No. 125-0250-000
Note:
The adjustable diverter comes with a5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)mounting assemblies that the usercan utilize to help orient the productaround a 90O transfer.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 105
Standard Mounts Note:These mounts are intended for surface mounting only. The 250 stands do notrequire a conveyor mount when ordering stands on pages 106 & 107.
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
1.25.135
W + 1.46
3.06
.34 DIA..22 DIA.
1.32
.88.59
.31
3.50
.38SLOT
1.32
1.15
.41
.13
2.06 *
Universal Raised Side Mount
W + 1.46
W + 1.71
W + 1.09 MAX.W + .57 MIN.
.135
1.25
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
3.50
.38SLOT
4.81
3.07
.88.59
.31
3.10
1.53
.13 5.28 *
To Order:Frame Mounted version attachesdirectly to the conveyor frame. Theframe has mounting holes every 3”.
Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.
Tee Mount
Notes:Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor and mountsthe conveyor to a flat surface.
To Order:
Attaches directly to the conveyorframe. The frame has mounting holesevery 3”.
Part No. 125-0010-00*
5/16 DIA.THRU HOLE
.135
W + 2.00
W + 1.37
2.04 *
1.56
4.00
3.00
.66
.22 1.00
1.60
Universal Bottom Mount
Notes:Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface.Cannot be used with high adhesion belts.
5/16-18SET SCREW
.257 DIA.THRU HOLE
11/32 DIA.
2.89 *
W - 1.50
W + 1.50
W - .75 W + 1.00
.43
.63
1.25 .16 .84
To Order:Attaches directly to the underside ofthe conveyor frame. To order, use thepart number below and fill in thenominal conveyor width in inches forthe last two digits.
Part No. 125-0011-WW *
Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125-0182-04 pictured
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
*Part No. denotes one bracket andnecessary hardware
Example: 125-0011-04*Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wideconveyor
125-0181-04 pictured
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 100-101.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Stands
106
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
Part No.125-0074-036 (Qty 1)125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal formounting brackets to analuminum stand, and allows quickmounting location changes.1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is providedfor attaching accessories
To order:
Swivel-In T Nut
To order:Aluminum Cross Ties
Example:125-0235-024
Part No.125 - 0235 -
Cross Ties - Available LengthsLLL
Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL”section above. A quantity of one includes (2) crossties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut tolength because of stand placement variations.
Inches24”36”48”60”72”96”
120”144”
LLL024036048060072096120144
Part No. 125-0122-04Swivel locking casterOrder (2) per standCasters can be added to eitheraluminum or steel stands. Swivellocking casters increase standheight by 5.50”.Casters should only be used withstands that are 1/3 as wide asthey are tall.
Casters are not recommended onmulti-frame conveyors.
To order:
Casters
To be used in conjunction with the aluminum standsat the top of the page. See opposing page fortypical layouts
WW
H1 - H2
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
06 - 0909 - 1212 - 1515 - 1818 - 2121 - 2424 - 2727 - 3030 - 33
33 - 3636 - 3939 - 4242 - 4545 - 4848 - 5151 - 5454 - 5757 - 60
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
H1 - H2H1 - H2
See the next page for table of part numbers
NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts areincluded with the stand but are specific to where the stand isattached to the conveyor. See opposing page.
NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the standframework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimumheight range is 12 - 15 inches
To order:Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
There are three different stand types.
QC Industries 513.753.6000 107
To Order:1) Choose the height rangefrom the left and enter intoH1 & H2 section of the partnumber
2) Enter the conveyor widthinto the WW section
3) If the conveyor is over120” in length, it will beconstructed in sections.Those sections are denotedon the conveyor orderingpage (pg. 95 or 99). Place astand at each frame joint.Denote those stands byadding the suffix FJ to thestand part number.
4) End drive 250’s require astand at the drive. Denotethis stand by adding thesuffix DS to the stand partnumber.
End Drive Typical Stand Layout
Center Drive Typical Stand Layout
Drive Support Stand
Prefix
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
0182DS-
H1-H2*
12-15
15-18
18-21
21-24
24-27
27-30
30-33
33-36
36-39
39-42
42-45
45-48
48-51
51-54
54-57
57-60
WW**
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
Frame Joint Stand
Prefix
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
0182FJ-
H1-H2*
06-09
09-12
12-15
15-18
18-21
21-24
24-27
27-30
30-33
33-36
36-39
39-42
42-45
45-48
48-51
51-54
54-57
57-60
WW**
see below¹
see below¹
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, thefunctionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
NOTE: The conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the overall height
03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
Example: 0182-27-30-10
Example: 0182FJ-27-30-10
Example: 0182DS-27-30-10
Frame Joint Stand
Drive Support Stand
Example: 0182DS-33-36-12Example: 0182FJ-33-36-12Example: 0182-33-36-12
Frame Joint Stand Frame Joint Stand
Example: 0182-33-36-18 Example: 0182FJ-33-36-18 Example: 0182-33-36-18
* Conveyor adds 1.89” to theoverall height
Prefix
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
0182-
Aluminum Exact Width Stand
H1-H2*
03-06
06-09
09-12
12-15
15-18
18-21
21-24
24-27
27-30
30-33
33-36
36-39
39-42
42-45
45-48
48-51
51-54
54-57
57-60
WW**
see below¹
see below¹
see below¹
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
see below
02
**WW (Conveyor Width)
¹Not compatible with the followingconveyor widths: 2”, 3”, 4”
250 Series Drives
108 QC Industries 513.753.6000
Service Factor - Chart 108-A
Serv
ice
Fact
or
5 10 7020 30 40 50 60
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 94 & 98). To choose a gear motor combination that works bestfor the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user mustknow the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the userthrough this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor DriveTorque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).
1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)
Enter the equivalent load determined on page 94 or 98. Divide this number by 2. The resultequals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages to write down the drive train torque (DTT) for theselected speed. Please note that there are two gearbox types listed; standard and high capacity, for each speed.Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
Use Chart 108-A below, based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enterthe result on Line Three.
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplieddrive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT,then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT >RCDT. If not, then:
A) Slow down the belt speedB) Choose high capacity gearboxC) Choose a wider conveyorD) Consult factory
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how touse the remaining drive pages.
1.
2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) 2.
3. Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.
4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) 4.
5. Determine Functionality
Starts and Stops per Hour
Hours of Operation per Day
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
80 90 100
24 16 8 2
Example:
Equivalent load = 150 (per conveyor technical data page)150 / 2 = 75 (RCDT)30 FPM (From page 111 - end drive)169 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (Standard capacity gearbox)8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.2)169 / 1.2 = 140 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 75SDTT = 140
140 75 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
Example:
Equivalent load = 250 (per conveyor technical data page)250 / 2 = 125 (RCDT)100 FPM (From page 113 - center drive)181 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (High Capacity Gearbox)16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5)181 / 1.5 = 121 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 125SDTT = 121
121 < 125 (Gearmotor assembly will not provide adequate torque)
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
Factor
QC Industries 513.753.6000 109
How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner.Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.
Voltage
Step 1:Choose an end orcenter drive (end drivepages 110 & 111,center drive pages 112& 113)
Step 2:Choose mountingarrangement & drivelocation
Step 3:Choose a speed
Step 4:Run drive sizingcalculations listed onpage 108
Step 5:Choose standard orhigh capacity gearbox.Note: Each speed hastwo rows. The top rowis a standard capacitygearbox, and thebottom is a highcapacity gearbox.Some speed andgearbox selections willhave two differenthorsepower motors.
Step 6:Choose voltagerequirements
Step 7:Put together two partnumbers, motormounting package andmotor by following fromleft to right
Step 3
Step 5
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
Ratio
50
40
30
Voltage
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
Prefix
16
16
16
GMtr.Sprocket Belt/ChainGearbox
SizePosition*MountingPrefixConv
SprocketGearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
FPM* HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
Face
42C
42C
42C
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
230/460Amp1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
125
150
1853171862592043211692661442871703591412971703711603491403078618111825711024071150102224128253120
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
G
0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
22
22
22
25
22
22
25
22
22
25
32
28
28
34
30
22
34
32
34
32
32
34
32
34
32
32
25
30
28
22
28
34
162516332550255033753375337525503375337525503375501H50
1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-13V D-
303020201515151510101010101015151010101015151010050505
G or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or J
1/61/41/61/31/41/21/41/21/33/41/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/21
1/2
3.6/1.94.6/2.63.6/1.97.2/3.64.6/2.68.8/4.44.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.34.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.34.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.38.8/4.412.4/6.28 8/4 4
1.3/.61.3/.61.3/.61.6/.81.3/.62.0/1.01.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.5
2.0/1.03.4/1.72 0/1 0
1.72.51.73.52.55
2.55
3.57.63.57.63.57.62.55
3.57.63.57.62.55
3.57.65105
42C42C42C42C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C56C56C56C
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 Example: 253-15G Voltage
Step 6
Speed
Torque
SizingInfo
DriveLocation
Step 2
QC Industries 513.753.6000 111
250 Series
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See drive position chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M2-E3J3-8M3225 (End Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number.4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
Ratio
50
40
30
Voltage
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
Prefix
16
16
16
GMtr.Sprocket Belt/ChainGearbox
SizePosition*MountingPrefixConv
SprocketGearboxHand
G or J
G or J
G or J
FPM* HP
1/6
1/6
1/6
Face
42C
42C
42C
Motor Part No. Example:1H3-05J (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive
115/230Amp
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
230/460Amp1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.3/.6
DCAmp1.7
1.7
1.7
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
125
150
160
180
220
230
250
300
340
360
1853171862592043211692661442871703591412971703711603491403078618111825711024071150102224128253120239106210881768316477153641285711353106
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
22
22
22
25
22
22
25
22
22
25
32
28
28
34
30
22
22
25
28
28
30
32
32
34
34
32
34
32
32
34
32
34
32
32
25
30
28
22
28
34
32
32
30
28
28
25
22
22
162516332550255033753375337525503375337525503375501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H
1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-
303020201515151510101010101015151010101015151010050505050505050505050505050505050505
G or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or JG or J
1/61/41/61/31/41/21/41/21/33/41/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
3.6/1.94.6/2.63.6/1.97.2/3.64.6/2.68.8/4.44.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.34.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.37.2/3.610.6/5.34.6/2.68.8/4.47.2/3.610.6/5.38.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.28.8/4.412.4/6.2
1.3/.61.3/.61.3/.61.6/.81.3/.62.0/1.01.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.51.6/.83/1.51.3/.62.0/1.01.6/.83/1.5
2.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72/0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.7
1.72.51.73.52.55
2.55
3.57.63.57.63.57.62.55
3.57.63.57.62.55
3.57.6510510510510510510510510510
42C42C42C42C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 Example: 253-15G Voltage
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 38For optional AC controls, see p. 38See controller on p. 38Customer to supply controller
13VD
See Drive Accessories pages (p. 114)for optional controllers, motor starters,e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series End Drive
110
A0A3
OB0OB3
-.04 .78
3.6410.94
//
1.89
C0C3
13.34
Drive Location1G
3J1G
3J
End Drive
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1001 1003 100V 1003ID
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
B3 6.78 6.78 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 7.19 6.19 6.13 6.76 7.19 7.19 6.13 8.18
Note:
If your application requires a standardcapacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, or C0dimensions. If it uses a high capacitygearbox, use the A3, B3, C3 dimensions.
Reference these drawings and the tablebelow
Motor Dimension Chart
C0 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56
Step 1
115VAC 1 PH
230/460 VAC 3 PH
90 VDC w/controller
90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage Key
1
3
V
D
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series End Drive
110
A0 A3
B0 DIA.B3 DIA.
D0 D3
10.94
3.64
1.89 *
7.83 C0 C3
13.34
Drive Location1G
3J1G
3J
End Drive
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
B3 6.78 6.78 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 7.19 6.19 6.13 6.76 7.19 7.19 6.13 8.18
Note:
If your application requires a standardcapacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, andD0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacitygearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3dimensions.
Reference these drawings and the tablebelow
Motor Dimension Chart
C0 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D3 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon running torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number.4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
Ratio505040403030
Voltage1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-
Prefix
161616161616
GMtr.Sprocket BeltGearbox
SizePosition*MountingPrefixConv
SprocketGearbox
HandG or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3
FPM* HP1/61/61/61/61/61/6
Motor Part No. Example:1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive
115/230Amp
3.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.9
230/460Amp
1.3/0.61.3/0.61.3/0.61.3/0.61.3/0.61.3/0.6
DCAmp1.71.71.71.71.71.7
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
125
150
160
180
220
230
250
300
340
360
1853171862592043211692661442871703591412971703711603491403078618111825711024071150102224128253120239106210881768316477153641285711353106
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
22
22
22
25
22
22
25
22
22
25
32
28
28
34
30
22
22
25
28
28
30
32
32
34
34
32
34
32
32
34
32
34
32
32
25
30
28
22
28
34
32
32
30
28
28
25
22
22
162516332550255033753375337525503375337525503375501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H
1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-
303020201515151510101010101015151010101015151010050505050505050505050505050505050505
G or JG3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3
1/61/41/61/31/41/21/41/21/33/41/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 Example: 253-15G Voltage
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 114For optional AC controls, see p. 114See controller on p. 114Customer to supply controller
13VD
See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115)for optional controllers, motor starters,e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs
111
Face425642564256
1.3/0.62.1/1.01.3/0.61.5/0.72.1/1.02.0/1.02.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.12.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.12.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.12.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.7
1.74.81.73.24.85
4.85
3.27.63.27.63.27.64.85
3.27.63.27.64.85
3.27.6510510510510510510510510510
3.6/1.97.4/3.73.6/1.95.2/2.87.4/3.78.8/4.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.4
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Center Drive
112
Center Drive
A0 A3
B0 DIA.B3 DIA.
D0 D3
10.94
3.64
1.89 *
7.83 C0 C3
13.34
Drive Location
3J1G
Note:
If your application requires a standardcapacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, andD0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacitygearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3dimensions.
Reference these drawings and the tablebelow
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
B3 6.78 6.78 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 7.19 6.19 6.13 6.76 7.19 7.19 6.13 8.18
Motor Dimension Chart
C0 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D3 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78
QC Industries 513.753.6000 113
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example:M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved2. Torque values are based upon running torque3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number.4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
Notes:
Ratio505040403030
Voltage1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-
Prefix
161616161616
GMtr.Sprocket BeltGearbox
SizePosition*MountingPrefixConv
SprocketGearbox
HandG or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3
FPM* HP1/61/61/61/61/61/6
Motor Part No. Example:1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive
115/230Amp
3.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.93.6/1.9
230/460Amp1.3/.61.3/.61.3/.61.3/.61.3/.61.3/.6
DCAmp1.71.71.71.71.71.7
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
125
150
160
180
220
230
250
300
340
360
1853171862592043211692661442871703591412971703711603491403078618111825711024071150102224128253120239106210881768316477153641285711353106
Torque (DTT)Inch Lbs.
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
M2-
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-0-3-
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
8M
22
22
22
25
22
22
25
22
22
25
32
28
28
34
30
22
22
25
28
28
30
32
32
34
34
32
34
32
32
34
32
34
32
32
25
30
28
22
28
34
32
32
30
28
28
25
22
22
162516332550255033753375337525503375337525503375501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H501H
1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-1,3,V, D-
303020201515151510101010101015151010101015151010050505050505050505050505050505050505
G or JG3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3G or J
G3 or J3
1/61/41/61/31/41/21/41/21/33/41/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/33/41/41/21/33/41/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
3.6/1.97.4/3.73.6/1.95.2/2.87.4/3.78.8/4.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.45.2/2.810.8/5.47.4/3.78.8/4.45.2/2.810.8/5.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.48.8/4.42.8/1.4
1.3/0.62.1/1.01.3/0.61.5/0.72.1/1.02.0/1.02.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.12.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.11.5/0.7
1.12.1/1.02.0/1.01.5/0.7
1.12.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.72.0/1.03.4/1.7
1.74.81.73.24.85
4.85
3.27.63.27.63.27.64.85
3.27.63.27.64.85
3.27.6510510510510510510510510510
42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C42C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C56C
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 Example: 253-15G Voltage
115 VAC 1 PH230/460 VAC 3 PH90 VDC w/controller90 VDC w/o controller
Voltage KeyFor optional AC controls, see p. 114For optional AC controls, see p. 114See controller on p. 114Customer to supply controller
13VD
See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115)for optional controllers, motor starters,e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs
Face425642564256
250 Series Drive Accessories
114 QC Industries 513.753.6000
2X .88 DIA. 2.50
1.253.45
8.00
6.00
5.00
5.00
3X .19 DIA.
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 1 EnclosureForward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-01 Standard NEMA 1DC Control125-0149-09* Wiring: cords & plugs
*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord fromcontrol to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).
Motor Controls
Standard DC Control
4X .18 DIA.
4.45
5.13
.34
2.84
2.40
4.57 5.73
Specifications/Features:115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULc/CEIP 20 Enclosure3-digit LED displayForward/Reverse switchRun/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttonsCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:*125-0054-5C-11-05 115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-21-05 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-23-20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20125-0054-5C-43-10 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20
Standard AC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output30:1 speed rangeUL/ULc/CENEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerForward/Off/Reverse switchMin/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown DC Control
2X 3/4 NPT
4.56
7.20 6.35.85
.19
5.63
5.16
2.20 1.20
2.12
Specifications/Features:
115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)UL/ULcNEMA 4X EnclosureSpeed adjustment potentiometerRun/Stop switchCarrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dustyenvironment. Washdown AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire this controller to the gearmotor
QC Industries 513.753.6000 115
Motion Controls
Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches
Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number125-0149-05125-0149-06125-0149-07125-0149-09
DescriptionON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motorFORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details
4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT
3.63
5.75
2.00
.72
.25 DIA.
5.13
The Motor Starter is an overload protection that alsoprovides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety.The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip toprotect against autostarting after the overload conditionhas been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection.
Specifications/Features:115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp maxUL/CSA/CEStart/Stop buttonsIP55 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:125-0054-38-115 115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-230 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure125-0054-38-460 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure
Motor Starter
LOCK-OUTTAG-OUT
TURN TO RELEASEE-STOP
5.88
2.50
2.25
3.13
The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the MotorStarter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motorfor safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains astart button for restarting the motor after the pushbuttonhas been released.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEE-Stop can be locked out/includes start buttonIP55 Rated
Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter
E-Stop Accessory
3.00
2.67
3.76
2.37 2.75
3.50
2.89
2X .22 DIA.
The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out powerto the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure andmounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directlyto the side of the conveyor frame.
Specifications/Features:Turn to releaseUL/CSA/CEIP65 Enclosure
To Order:Part Number:ELECT-063-WBRKT E-Stop with enclosure
Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frameRemote E-StopNote: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properlywire motor starter and e-stops
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Application Assistance Form
1
QC Industries4057 Clough Woods Dr.Batavia, OH 45103513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001www.qcindustries.com
Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record thepart numbers. This sheet can be used to document your applicationand request a quotation.
Record your part numbers here:
Conveyor
Side/Guide Rails
Mounts
Stands/CrossTies
Gearmotor Mounting
Gearmotor
Controllers/Drives
Application Details
Part DescriptionLoad Information
Chemical ConsiderationFDA Consideration
USDA ConsiderationStatic Electricity Consideration
Application Notes
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries
Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself:
Part Dimensions: W L H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Concentrated Side LoadingUniformly Distributed Accumulating
Environment Description
Part WeightMax Load
Environment Information
Contact InformationCompanyAddressCity, State, Zip
ContactPhoneFax
Area to sketch ideas/layouts
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: Ifyou have an FDA consideration, you will want to choose a corrosion resistant constructionwith a stainless steel frame.
Step 2Choose the width and length (in inches) you require. Please figure the equivalent load onthe conveyor to ensure you have correctly sized a conveyor for the application.Record your equivalent load here.
Step 3Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint:Gang driven applications require different drive pulleys. Reference page 41 for details.Different tail pulleys are described on pages 42 and 43.
Step 4Choose a belt from page 15, 20-21, 51, or 52-53.
Record your part number above.
Construction (S=Standard, R=Corrosion Resistant)Drive Type (E=End Drive)
Frame Type (See page 11, 15, or 19)
Series (1=125)
Frame Style (H= Straight)Width (in inches)
Drive LocationDrive Pulley
Belt
Length (in inches)
Tail
1 2 3 4
2
5
64
3
1
7
Equivalent Load
QC Industries 513.753.6000 2
2 Side/Guide Rails
Step 1Choose from the options listed on pages 22-25 and 54-57. *Application hint: Adjustableguide rails have an extra digit at the end of the part number (see page 23).
Step 3Enter the nominal length of the conveyor in these three positions.Note: Some product containment/lane divider/hopper part numbers have slightly differentpart number legends. Please refer to those pages for the correct part number.
3 Conveyor Mounts
Step 1Choose from the options listed on pages 26-27, and 58. *Application hint: Mounts are usedto attach conveyors to stands and other surfaces. Some mounts will not work with certainbelting or conveyor configurations. Check the Notes area to ensure compatibility. Step 2Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designatorof how it is mounted or a conveyor width.
Mount Identifier
Mount Specific Suffix
Prefix
1 2 3
125
4 Stands
Step 1Choose from the options listed on pages 28, 29, and 59. *Application hint: Choose betweenaluminum, powder coated steel, or stainless steel stands. Note that powder coated steelstands extend wider than conveyor width.
Step 2Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.
Step 3Choose the stand width. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.
Note: QC recommends cross ties (see pages 28-29) for all applications. Additionally werecommend that the stands be bolted to the floor.
Upper height range
Stand Width
Stand Identifier
1 2 3
5 Gearmotor Mounting
Step 1Enter M1 in the first two digits.
Step 2Refer to page 31 and 61 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choosetop, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.
Step 3Refer to pages 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65 to choose reducer type and handing.
Step 4If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocketcombinations (page 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65)
6 Gearmotor
Step 1Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 31 or 61.
Step 2Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: If choosing a heavy duty motor, choose a ‘V’ option to have a90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All ACcontrollers are sold separately.
Step 3Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections.
Record your part number on previous page.
Voltage
Gear reducer ratio
Horsepower
1 2 3
Side/Guide Identifier
Conveyor Length (in inches)
Prefix
1 2 3
125
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Lower height range
Gear reducer size & handing
Mounting (M=Mounting)
1 2 3
Series (1=125)Motor mounting position & type
4
Belt/chain identifier
Sprocket/pulley combinations
Step 2Choose the rail or guide identifier from pages 22-24 or 54-57.
Step 3Enter mount specific suffix.
QC Industries 513.753.6000
QC Industries4057 Clough Woods Dr.Batavia, OH 45103513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001www.qcindustries.com
Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record thepart numbers. This sheet can be used to document your applicationand request a quotation.
Record your part numbers here:
Conveyor
Guide Rails
Flared Rails / Hopper
Stands/CrossTies
Gearmotor Mounting
Gearmotor
Controllers/Drives
Application Details
Part DescriptionLoad Information
Application Notes
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries
Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself:
Part Dimensions: W L H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Concentrated Side LoadingUniformly Distributed Accumulating
Environment Description
Part WeightMax Load
Environment Information
Contact InformationCompanyAddressCity, State, Zip
ContactPhoneFax
Denote ‘Z’ Conveyor Application Here
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1Choose from the options in the catalog (page 80). *Application hint: Please follow theinstructions on page 78 and build the application and part number from pages 78 through81.Step 2Choose the width, length, and angle your application requires. *Application hint: Eachconfiguration (Z, L, or R) has different length sections. The angle is always denoted afterthe first frame section. Ex 024B036Step 3Choose from the options in the catalog (page 81).Step 4Choose a belt from page 81. *Application hint: Cleat width and useable belt width isdetermined by the rail systems chosen; a corrugated sidewall (rail built into the belt) or aguide rail.Step 5Determine the number of cleats along the belt (page 81)
Record your part number above.
Construction (S=Standard)Drive Type (E=End Drive)
Frame Type (See page 80)
Series (1=125)
Frame Style (Z,L, or R)Width (in inches)
Drive LocationDrive Pulley
Belt
Length and angle
Tail
1 2 3 4
2
5
6
4
3
1
7
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Application Assistance Form
1
Denote ‘L’ Conveyor Application Here Denote ‘R’ Conveyor Application Here
DimensionsRecord all the knowndimensions of theapplication in theboxes to the right.For a ‘U’ or ‘N’application pleasecontact the factory.
Equivalent Load
Cleats
5
2 Guide Rails
Note:Fill in this part number only when using an adjustable guide rail (page 82) instead of acorrugated sidewall belt. Otherwise, skip this step. *Application hint: Adjustable guide railsleave a clearance between the bottom of the rail and the belt. If carrying small partsconsider a corrugated sidewall belt.Step 1Enter the series and guide rail designator as shown.
3 Flared Rails / Hopper
Step 1Choose from the options listed on page 83. *Application hint: Combine the flared side railsand end stops together for a hopper. See bottom of page 83. Step 2Choose a flared side rail (1004) and/or one or two end stops (0234).
Rail IdentifierEnd Stop Identifier
Rail Specific SuffixStop Specific Suffix
Prefix
1 2 3
Z
4 Stands
Step 1Enter the prefix number as shown. *Application hint: If you application requires an infeed heightof 9” or less choose from the stands on page 84, otherwise reference page 85)
Step 2Choose a caster or foot type stand.
Step 3Choose the top of belt height range for your application. Use the information from pages 84 - 85in choosing your stands. Reference pages 84 - 85 in choosing the standard height ranges.
Step 4Choose the width of your conveyor. Note: low range stands do not require this designation. Werecommend that the stands be bolted to the floor.
Upper height rangeStand Width
Stand Identifier
1 3 4
5 Gearmotor Mounting
Step 1Enter M1 in the first two digits.
Step 2Refer to page 87 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top,bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.
Step 3Refer to page 89 to choose reducer type and hand.
Step 4If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocketcombinations (page 89).
6 Gearmotor
Step 1Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 87.
Step 2Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller.Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately.
Step 3Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections.
Record your part number on previous page.
Voltage
Gear reducer ratio
Horsepower
1 2 3
Side/Guide Identifier
A Frame
Prefix
1 3
Z
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Lower height range
Gear reducer size & handing
Mounting (M=Mounting)
1 2 3
Series (1=125)Motor mounting position & type
4
Belt/chain identifier
Sprocket/pulley combinations
2
028
2
B Frame C FrameAngle
Step 2Enter the angle (B,C,D,E, or F).Step 3Enter the frame section lengths (in inches) for sections a, b, and c (c option for Z configurations).
10040234
Step 3Enter the three digit length for the flared rail (make sure it is 6” smaller than the a section).Enter the two digit width for the end stop.
223
2
Caster or Foot
QC Industries 513.753.6000
QC Industries 513.753.6000
250 Series Application Assistance Form
1
QC Industries4057 Clough Woods Dr.Batavia, OH 45103513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001www.qcindustries.com
Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record thepart numbers. This sheet can be used to document your applicationand request a quotation.
Record your part numbers here:
Conveyor
Guide Rails
Mounts
Stands / Cross Ties
Gearmotor Mounting
Gearmotor
Controllers / Drives
Application Details
Part DescriptionLoad Information
Chemical ConsiderationFDA Consideration
USDA ConsiderationStatic Electricity Consideration
Application Notes
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries
Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself:
Part Dimensions: W L H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Concentrated Side LoadingUniformly Distributed Accumulating
Environment Description
Part WeightMax Load
Environment Information
Contact InformationCompanyAddressCity, State, Zip
ContactPhoneFax
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99). *Application hint: Center drivesoffer longer conveyor lengths.
Step 2Choose the width and length your application requires. *Application hint: Conveyor lengths120” and uder are made from one frame. Those over 120” are made with multiple frames.The center drive has a nominal 48” drive frame section while the end drive has a nominal36” drive frame section. Reference drawings on pages 92 and 96 for detailsNote: Center drive conveyors have the drive pulley located in the center of the conveyorlength. For other drive locations options contact the factory.
Step 3Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99).
Step 4Choose a belt from pages 100-101. *Application hint: Some longer conveyor applicationsmay require the belt to be mechanically spliced. Consult the factory for details.
Record your part number above.
Construction (S=Standard)Drive Type (E=End Drive or C= Center Drive)
Frame Type (See page 95 or 99)
Series (2=250)
Frame Style (H= Horizontal)Width (in inches)
Drive LocationDrive Pulley
Belt
Length (in inches)
Tail
1 2 3 4
2
56
4
3
1
7
Area to sketch ideas/layouts
For surface mounting
Equivalent Load
2
2 Side/Guide Rails
Step 1Choose from the options listed on pages 102-104.
Step 3Enter the nominal length of the conveyor or the frame section. *Application hint: The bolton extrusions are slightly shorter than the actual frame length.
3 Conveyor Mounts
Step 1Choose from the options listed on page 105. *Application hint: Mounts for the 250 Seriesare used for surface mounting only. They are not needed if using the stands listed onpages 106-107.
Step 2Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designatorof how it is mounted or a conveyor width.
Mount Identifier
Mount Specific Suffix
Prefix
1 2 3
125
4 Stands
Step 1Choose from the options listed on pages 106-107. *Application hint: Reference thedrawings on page 107 for typical stand layouts and part numbers. Certain stands require atwo digit stand style to be added to the four digit prefix.
Step 2Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.
Step 3Choose the stand width. Reference page 107
Note: QC recommends cross ties (see page 106) for all applications. Additionally, werecommend that the stands be bolted to the floor.
Upper height rangeStand Width
Stand Identifier
1 2 3
5 Gearmotor Mounting
Step 1Enter M2 in the first two digits. *Application hint: There are two different capacitygearboxes to choose from (standard or high) Refer to sizing instructions on page 108.
Step 2Refer to page 108-109 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choosean end or center drive and which side of the conveyor the drive will be attached.*Application hint: Both center and end drives use a ‘C’ designator.
Step 3Refer to pages 110 or 112 to choose reducer type and hand. If using a high capacitygearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.
Step 4Choose the belt identifier and enter the sprocket ratios as listed on page 111 or 113.
6 GearmotorStep 1Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 108. Note that some applications require a highcapacity gearbox which will require a different horsepower motor be chosen
Step 2Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller.Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately (pg 114).
Step 3Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. If using a high capacitygearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.
Record your part number on previous page.
Voltage
Gear reducer ratio
Horsepower
1 2 3
Side/Guide Identifier
Conveyor Length or framelength (in inches)
Prefix
1 2 3
250
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Record your part number on previous page.
Lower height range
Gear reducer size & handing
Mounting (M=Mounting)
1 2 3
Series (2=250)Motor mounting position & type
4
Belt identifier
Sprocket combinations
Step 2Choose the identifier from pages 102-103.
Step 3Enter mount specific suffix
Stand Style
0182
M2 C 8M
QC Industries 513.753.6000
QC Industries 513.753.6000
Warranty & RGA
122
QC INDUSTRIES CONVEYOR WARRANTY
QC INDUSTRIES warrants that our conveyors are free from defects in materials and workmanship and fit for the ordinary purposes for which such goods areused, under normal installation, use and service for one (1) year from date of purchase or 2100 hours of running use, whichever is sooner. QC INDUSTRIES willreplace any defective part within the warranty period, without charge, provided:
The Purchaser gives QC INDUSTRIES prompt written notice of the defect, including the date of purchase and original purchase order number.The Purchaser will then be given a return goods authorization number (RGA #) which must be displayed on all labels and packing slips returned withmerchandise. (See RGA section)The Purchaser pays for delivery of the defective part to QC Industries for inspection and verification of the defect.The Purchaser shall pay all shipping and insurance charges for the replacement part from QC INDUSTRIES and the cost of installing the replacement part.
This warranty is limited to the replacement of defective parts. QC INDUSTRIES WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ANY DEFECT IN THIS UNIT.This warranty shall not apply if any failure of this unit or its parts is caused by unreasonable use, lack of maintenance, improper maintenance and/or repairs,incorrect adjustments, exposure to corrosive or abrasive material, moisture causing damage, or any modification or alteration affecting the operation of the unitwhich is not authorized by QC INDUSTRIES in writing. This warranty shall not apply to the following items that are covered by their manufacturer's warranty,subject to any limitation contained in those warranties.
(A) Bearings(B) Motors
CAUTION: Any attempt to repair such items may actually void the manufacturer's warranty. Any description of this unit is only to identify it and it not a warrantythat the unit fits the description. Only an official of QC INDUSTRIES may make any warranties for QC INDUSTRIES. Any warranties implied by law are limited induration to the one (1) year term of this warranty. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN, QC INDUSTRIES MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHEREXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY FOR FITNESS OR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LOST OR DAMAGED GOODS: PLEASE READ THESE IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
Shipments should be inspected immediately upon receipt for lost or damaged goods. Any loss or damage should be noted on the carriers receipt (or bill of lading)at the time of acceptance. If items are perceived to be lost or damaged after the shipment has been accepted, it becomes more difficult to file a claim with thecarrier if the receipt does not indicate such loss or damage. Do not, at any time, request the carrier to return any items or shipment to QC Industries withoutprevious authorization from our company for such a return. Please notify QC Industries as soon as any loss or damage is discovered and request the departmentthat handles the lost or damaged goods. You will need to know a complete description of all lost or damaged items. If replacement items are needed, a purchaseorder made out to QC Industries will need to be supplied. QC Industries will then contact the carrier's local agent and request that an inspection of the items beperformed. This is absolutely necessary. Unless an inspection is performed, the carrier will not entertain any claim for loss or damage. After the inspection hasbeen completed, the carrier will notify QC Industries. If the carrier takes responsibility for the claim, a credit will be issued to you for the replacement item(s),including freight charges from QC Industries, where applicable. If the carrier does not take responsibility for the claim, a representative of QC Industries willcontact you.
RETURNED GOODS AUTHORIZATION AND ORDER CANCELLATION REVISION POLICY
If, for any reason, an item needs to be returned to QC Industries or an in-house order needs to be cancelled or revised, the Purchaser is required to adhere to thefollowing series of steps to ensure that the return or cancellation is handled in the proper manner.
RGA POLICY/INSTRUCTIONSPromptly call QC Industries at (513) 753-6000 and request the department that handles Returned Goods Authorization. At this time, you will be asked toanswer pertinent questions relating to the returned items. We ask that you have the following information ready:
• Name of distributor (if applicable) through which item(s) were purchased.• Name of the Customer and/or end user of the item(s).• Any/all purchase order numbers related to the item(s) in question.• Phone number and names of contacts involved in the return (as it may become necessary that they be contacted later).• Complete part numbers of all items involved in the return.• Complete description as the reason for the return and the actions that need to be taken. (If the item is to be replaced, a new purchase order numbermust be supplied by the Purchaser along with complete shipping and billing instructions. These replacements will be treated as separate orders by QCIndustries and evaluated for possible credit only after returned items are received and evaluated.)
After the call has been made to QC Industries, we will process your RGA and you will be faxed the RGA number to use for returning the item(s). RGAnumbers will not be given verbally over the phone.Upon receipt of your RGA, you are required to return the item(s) within 30 days of receipt of said authorization. After 30 days, the Return Authorization willbe void if item(s) have not been received by QC Industries. All shipping charges and freight insurance charges of returned goods will the responsibility of thePurchaser.The RGA number must be clearly marked on the outside of all packages. It must also be on any paperwork, packing slips, or delivery receipts. If there is noRGA number visible on the package, the package may be refused and sent back at the Purchaser's expense.After receipt of returned goods, QC Industries will evaluate the item(s) for credit and take the appropriate action based on each situation. Standard items arereturned in new, resalable condition, will be credited for the amount of the purchase less 20%. Full credit will only be issued on items that are considered tobe defective at the time of shipment from QC Industries and are evaluated to be under warranty. Please allow 30 days for credits to be issued.
ORDER CANCELLATION/REVISION POLICYIf it becomes necessary to cancel or revise an order prior to the order being shipped, QC Industries reserves the right to evaluate each order that is to becancelled or revised and determine if any charges are applicable. A 20% Restocking Charge will apply if an order is assembled and ready to ship prior to itscancellation or revision and the order is totally comprised of standard stock items. If the order contains other than stock items, an evaluation will be made basedon the status of the order. Additional charges will be included with the 20% Restocking Charge if any of the following conditions are met:
The order contains any items that are considered to be non-stock items and these items have already been produced by QC Industries or one of itssuppliers.The order contains any items that require special handling or assembly and these processes have been completed.The Customer has specified that they will pick up an order from QC's facility by a predetermined time and that time frame has expired. In this case, QC willmake an attempt to notify the Customer. If this cannot be accomplished in a reasonable time, the order will be disassembled and the Customer will becharged a restocking fee and any additional charges based on the order's contents as explained herein.
1.2.
3.4.
(C) Reducers(D) Controllers
(E) Casters(F) Belts (unless otherwise agreed to in writing)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.3.
123
AccumulationAssemblyAutomotiveBar Code ScanningBulk ProductClean Room OperationsCosmeticsCuringDivertingElectronic Component AutomationFood ProcessingHigh Temperature ApplicationsIncline/Decline OperationsInk Jet PrintingInspectionLabelingMachine IntegrationMaterial HandlingMedicalMetal StampingPackagingPalletized OperationsParts SeparationPart and Scrap RemovalPharmaceuticalPlastics MoldingRobotic IntegrationScanningWeighingWorkcells
125
Ser
ies
Stan
dard
125
Ser
ies
Mag
netic
125
Ser
ies
Cle
ated
125
Serie
s C
orro
sion
Res
istan
t
125
Z S
erie
s A
ngle
d Fr
ame
250
Ser
ies
Stan
dard
Conveyor Selection GuideSelection Guide
QC IndustriesLLC
• • •• • •• • • • •• • •• • •• •• •• • •• •••
••
• •• •• • • •• •• • •• • •• • • • • •• •• • •• • • •• • • • •• •• • • • •• • • •• • •• • •••••
•••
• ••••
•
This Guide is intended to providea general reference as to the mostcommon application use. Forassistance contact our applicationspecialists.
QC Industries 513.753.6000